(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "The nursing sister; a manual for candidates and novices of hospital communities, and beginners in training schools in general."

nil 



* ., . i i^B «». — - f f\ % ~^^A ji»- 



. in 



illlliHH 




«$MIIlltI 



» [( S3 ji u^ 







I— 1 



PROPERTY OF 

ST. JOHN'S HOSPITAL 

HEALTH SCIENCE LIBRARY 

Springfield, IL 62769 



OEMCO 






?» n «Bf 



^4f 



Digitized by the Internet Archive 

in 2010 with funding from 

CARLI: Consortium of Academic and Research Libraries in Illinois 



http://www.archive.org/details/nursingsistermanOOstjo 



» I 1 ' w 



The Nursing Sister, 



A MANUAL 



CANDIDATES AND NOVICES 



HOSPITAL COMMUNITIES 

AND BEGINNERS IN TRAINING SCHOOLS IN GENERAL. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 



PREPARED RT 

St. John's Hospital Training School 

SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS. 



Second Edition. 



1900. 



For sale at St. John's Hospital, Springfield, III. Price, $1.25. 



SPRINGFIELD. ILL.: 

H. W. Rokker, Printer and Binder, 

1900. 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1899, by 

REV. L. HINSSEN, 

In the office of the Librarian of Congress. 



PREFACE 



In compiling this Manual, several hand-books of 
nursing* have been consulted and their contents 
more or less used. My motive for adding another 
to the many useful and excellent books on nursing 
already in existence was, because I have not suc- 
ceeded so far in finding a single one among them 
exactly adapted to meet the special wants of young 
beginners in Hospital communities, viz.: the candi- 
dates and novices. Most of them as a rule apply 
for admission to the community when they are yet 
very young. All are actuated by the holiest motives 
which religion inspires, to devote their lives to the 
alleviation of suffering humanity for Christ's sake, 
but are often without much experience of practical life 
and with no knowledge of Hospital work whatever. 
Many a candidate loses her courage before the first 
year of probation is at an end, on account of the 
great task before her, viz.: of learning within the 
two years of probation the prescribed hand-books 
and all practical work that is required of a nurse 
if she expects to pass the last examination success- 
fully. Undoubtedly, the practical side of the train- 
ing of a nurse is the most important one, but the 
theoretical instruction must go hand in hand with 
it. The latter, as a rule, offers the most difficulties 
for young beginners. Many of the inevitable diffi- 
culties might be lessened if the best method of 
meeting them is pursued. After some years of prac- 
tical experience in our Training School this best 

1 J 2€ 



IV 1'liEFACE. l 



method seemed to be, to analyze at the daily instruc- 
tions the particular chapter of the hand-book of 
nursing, in short, well chosen questions and answers, 
easy to remember, and then let the practical in- 
struction follow. This is the history of the origin 
of the present Manual. It is a short, popular guide 
on the art of nursing, which gives the substance 
of larger hand-books, prepares the candidates and 
novices gradually and easily for the study of more 
difficult books on nursing and the final examination, 
and is for all Sisters a source of correct informa- 
tion on all matters connected with their vocation 
as nurses. It was originally only intended for the 
Training School of St. John's Hospital. But the 
many favorable comments I received, both from 
men of the medical profession and Sisters, induced 
me to put it on the market, for the benefit of the 
many religious communities which conduct hospitals 
in cities, where it is impossible to have a regular 
staff of professors for a training school for nurses. 
By means of this Manual every well conducted hos- 
pital can have its school for the intelligent and 
practical training of its own members. 

I specifically acknowledge here that I largely 
copied from the excellent "Hand-book of Nursing, 
by the Connecticut Training School," of which 
Messrs. J. B. Lippincott Comp., Philadelphia, hold 
the copyright, who, in the interest of the good 
cause, kindly gave their permission, and it affords 
me a pleasure hereby to express our thanks to 

them. 

Louis Hinssen, 

Director St. John's Hospital. 



CONTENTS. 



FIRST CHAPTER, 



The Necessary Qualifications of a Sister of Charity. 

Pages. 
Her vocation as a religious and as a nurse. Her 
duties in the hospital. In private families. To- 
wards the doctor. The patient and family. Her 
meals and exercise. Bandaging, etc 1-1!) 



SECOND CHAPTER, 



The Sick Room. 

Best situation in private houses. The private rooms 
and wards in hospital. Bedside. Table. Slop- 
pails. Bed pans. Disinfecting. Temperature. 
Ventilation. Fumigating. Putting room in order. 
Bedmaking. Airing, etc 19-35 



VI CONTENTS. 



THIRD CHAPTER. 



The Patient. 

Lifting the patient. Arranging the pillows. Cleaning 
of patient. Bathing. Plunge bath. Foot bath. 
Combing the hair. Bedsores. Giving of medicine. 
Clerical record. Protecting the patient. Food 
at night. Serving meals. Feeding. Observation 
of symptoms. Laying out a corpse. Taking 
temperature. Night watching, etc 35-81 



FOURTH CHAPTER. 



Some Useful ok Necessaky Utensils, Etc. 

Atomizer. Bedrest. Catheters. Enema syringe. 
Bed-pans. Leeches. Cupping. Poultices. Coun- 
ter irritants. Lotions. Applications. Fomen- 
tations 81-113 



FIFTH CHAPTER, 



Some Special Medical Cases. 

Typhoid fever. Care of room in typhoid fever. Feed- 
ing the patient. Diet when patient is allowed to 
take solid food. For convalescents. Typhus. 
Scarlet fever. Smallpox. Dangers in the disease. 
Disinfecting. Chickenpox. Measles. Spasmodic 
Croup. Membraneous Croup. Diphtheritis. 
Whooping Cough. Pneumonia. Pulmonary. 



CONTENTS. Vll 



Tubercolosis. Pleurisy. Cholera Morbus. Asia- 
tic Cholera. Diarrhoea. Dysentery.. Intestinal 
Colic. Hepatic colic. Gastritis. Dyspepsia. Per- 
itonitis. Appendicitis. Sore throat. Bronchitis. 
Asthma. Laryngitis. Catarrh. Dropsy. Bright's 
disease. Renal Colic. Nettle Rash. Eczema. 
Herpes. Itch. Cerebral apoplexy. Paralysis. 
Neuralgia. Epilepsy. Hysteria. St. Vitus dance. 
Cerebral meningitis. Rheumatism. Malaria 
fever 113-178 



SIXTH CHAPTER. 



Temperature. Pulse. Respiration. Urine 179-186 



SEVENTH CHAPTER. 



Disinfecting in communicable diseases 187-190 



EIGHTH CHAPTER. 



Surgical Nursing-. 

Surgical nursing. Wounds. Operations. Operating 

room 19 1-209 



VIII CONTENTS. 

NINTH CHAPTER. 

Laporatompy. Rules for Sisters in the surgical ward 

and operating room 210-215 

TENTH CHAPTER. 

Gynaecological Cases 216-221 

ELEVENTH CHAPTER. 

Fractures and other accidents 222-231 

TWELFTH CHAPTER. 
Hemorrhage 232-239 

THIRTEENTH CHAPTER. 
Emergencies 240-241 

FOURTEENTH CHAPTER. 

TriE Human Body. 
Bones of the Head. Bones of the trunk. Bones of the 
upper limbs. Bones of the lower limbs. Skin. 
Muscles. Brain Organs of Sense. Lungs. Heart. 
Blood vessels. Arteries. Veins. Blood Circu- 
lation of blood. Digestion 241-258 



THE NURSING SISTER 



FIRST CHAPTER. 



The Necessary Qualifications of a Sister of Charity. 
Q. What is required of a Sister of Charity? 

She should constantly strive after perfection, both as 
a religious and in her vocation as nurse. 

Q. What is necessary for her as a religious? 

1. She must have the vocation to the religious life. 
Q. What are the sure signs of this vocation? 

a A firm belief that it is God who calls her to the 
religious life in the convent. 

b A long felt and well considered desire for this 
life. 

c The necessary qualifications of body and mind to 
lead such a life. 

d The consent of her spiritual director, 
e The admission to any hospital community approved 
by ecclesiastical authority. 

Q. 2. What else is necessary for 'her as a religious? 

To strive after Christian perfection as prescribed by 
the Gospel, the Rule of the Community and the guidance of 
her superiors. 

Q. What is necessary for her as a nurse? 

Her motives for becoming a Sister of Charity must be 

1 . To serve God. 

2. To sanctify herself and gain merits for heaven by 
works of mercy. 

3. To alleviate the sufferings of others for the love 
of Jesus. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. What else is required? 

1. G-ood religious and secular education. 

2. Health of body and mind. 

3. Cheerful disposition and interest in the work. 

4. Cleanliness. 

5. Great equanimity of mind. 

6. Patience with the shortcomings and imperfections 
of others. 

7. A good theoretical and practical training in nurs- 
ing. 

Q. Where does a candidate receive this training? 

As a rule in the Motherhouse of the Community. 
Q. In how many different ways may a Sister be called 
upon to nurse the sick? 

1. In the hospital to which she has been sent by her 
Superiors, and there she may have to nurse 

a Either in the wards, or 
b In private rooms. 

2. In private families out of the hospital. 
Q. What are her duties in the hospital? 

1. To observe all regulations of the house. 

2. To carry out faithfully all orders 
a Of the doctor. 

b Of the Superiors. 

c Of the head nurses in the different departments, 
to whom she has been assigned to assist. 

3. Never change places, medicine or treatment with- 
out permission of doctor and Superior. 

4. To be clean, exact and punctual in giving meals 
and medicine to the patients in her care. 

5. To obey cheerfully and promptly her Superior. 

6. To obey the sign of the bell, that calls her 
a To rise in the morning. 

b To prayers, meditation and other religious duties, 
c To instruction, 
d To meals. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 



e To work. 

f To recreation. 

g To doctor or patient. 

h To rest. 

7. To nurse all patients, be they poor or rich, edu- 
cated or igdorant, in the wards or in private rooms, as well as 
she is able, for the love of Jesus. 

8. To observe silence, as prescribed by the rule, and 
avoid all unnecessary talking. 

9. To be kind to all, intimate with none. 

10. To do well whatever she is called upon to do, re- 
membering that she is in the service of the Lord, to whom 
she will have to give an account, at the hour of death, of 
every thought, word and action. 

Q. What are her duties in private nursing out of the 
hospital? 

Whilst in the hospital the daily routine work to be 
done is distributed among many, which lessens the burden 
and responsibility of the individual Sister; in private nurs- 
ing the Sister has to attend to all that is to be done for the 
patient, and she alone is responsible to the doctor. 

Hence she must 

1. Carry out faithfully all directions of the doctor. 

2. Keep the clinical record regularly and faithfully. 

3. Be clean, exact and punctual in giving meals and 
medicine to the patient. 

4. Attend to the ventilating and cleaning of the 
•room, washing and bathing of the patient, etc. 

5. Protect the patient against draughts, excitement, 
noise and visitors. 

Q. When is a Sister generally called for private nursing 

outside the hospital? 

When the family is worn out and needs immediate 
relief. 

Q. What can a Sister, therefore, not expect when she is 
called for private nursing? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 



To begin with a good night's rest, though she may 
arrive tired and after a long journey. 

Q. How will she generally find a family at her arrival? 
Exhausted from care, watching and anxiety, and for 
this reason she must be ready to shoulder the burden which 
they are not able to bear a moment longer. 
Q. What must she, therefore, do? 

She must at once take her official position, not wait- 
ing to be told what to do, but to do at once what is to 
be done. 

Q. What should a Sister always bear in mind whilst she 
is in the house? 

That a life is entrusted to her keeping, and that she 
alone is responsible to the physician. 

Importance of Personal Appearance. 

Q. What will help much towards inspiring the patient's 

confidence for a Sister? 

A pleasant personal appearance. 

Q. How can this be secured? 

It can be secured by extreme neatness in dress, clean 

handkerchiefs, attention to the skin, the hands, the teeth, 

etc All these things distinguish a well trained Sister from 

an ignorant one. 

Q. What should be worn at night? 

Warm night slippers. 

Q. What should be done to keep the hands in order? 

A few drops of glycerine rubbed in at night will keep 

the hands smooth if care is taken to wipe them dry each time 

they are put in water. 

Q. What water is best used on hands? 

Hot water is thought better than warm or cold. 

Q. To what should a Sister accustom herself in using her 

hands? 

To a light touch. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. For what reason 

A sensitive patient is often disturbed by the weight 
of a hand, or by moist, clammy hands. 

Another Aid to Make a Sister Personally Acceptable. 

Q. What else will aid in making a Sister personally ac- 
ceptable to the patient? 

Great care in frequently changing and airing her 
clothes. 

Q. What removes disagreeable odors from sweats, etc? 
A few drops of ammonia in the water used for wash- 
ing will remove disagreeable odors from perspiration. 

Q. What will be very refreshing and can be accomplished 
easy? 

A frequent bath, with a simple basin and towel, in 
the following manner: Wring out a rough cloth in soap and 
water, and rub yourself briskly from head to foot. 
Q. How long will this bath take? 

Five minutes will suffice each day and help in keeping 
you healthy, fresh and pleasant. 

Q. What should never be done in the presence of a 
patient? 

Never trim your finger nails, though they must be 
kept scrupulously clean; never use an ear or tooth-pick. 

Conduct Towards Servants. 

Q. How should a Sister, when in private families, con- 
duct herself towards the servants of a family? 

She should be careful not to cause them unnecessary 
trouble and work. 

Q. What should she always acknowledge? 

Any little service rendered, by saying, thank you. 
Q. What impression should she endeavor to establish? 
That she has come to share, not to increase the extra 
work, that sickness always brings to a house. 



6 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What should the Sister do with the dishes used for 
the patient? 

The Sister should wash and return to their places 
cups, plates, spoons, etc., used for the patient. 
Q. To what should she not add unnecessarily? 
To the laundry. 

Conduct Towards the Family. 

Q. What has the family to expect from a Sister? 

The family has a right to expect from a Sister a cheer- 
ful, helpful spirit in all things, and confidence. 

Q. About what should she not be too particular? 

She should not be too* particular about the dignity of 
her vocation. 

Q. What is her duty towards the doctor? 

To carry out all his directions. 
Q. What must she do for the patient? 

All that is essential for the patient in the way she 
knows best. 

About the Meals of the Sister. 

Q. What understanding should she make about the 
meals? 

For the patient's sake, as well as for her own, and in 
obedience to the rules of the community, the Sister should 
request the family where she is nursing, from the beginning, 
that her meais be served alone out of the sickroom. 
Q. What must the Sister avoid besides this? 

She must never turn up the gas bright in a sickroom 
in order to be able to sew or knit. 
Q. Why? 

Because the bright light is not pleasant to the eyes of 
a sick person. Moreover, one gas-burner consumes a large 
am©«nt of air needed for the patient. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 



Rest and Exercise. 

Q. When can a Sister take rest, when her patient is 
very ill? 

If the patient is very ill, rest can only be taken at odd 
times, when he can safely be trusted with some member of 
the family. 

Q. What is very important for the Sister to cultivate in 
regard to sleep? 

She should accustom herself to the habit of light 
sleep. 

Q. What is often necessary with very ill patients? 

It sometimes is necessary to be wide awake all night. 
Q. What should a Sister provide for in this case? 

In this case the Sister must not neglect to provide for 
a cup of coffee and some refreshments, to be taken, if possible, 
in an adjoining room. 

Q. What else should be kept in an adjoining room? 

The little things and utensils necessary to use in care 
of the sick. 

Q. What must a Sister be allowed occasionally? 

She must be relieved occasionally from her work, and 
allowed at least four hours undisturbed sleep, and a little ex- 
ercise in the fresh air not less than twice a week. 

Q. How long is a Sister expected to remain in private 
nursing? 

Until she is recalled by her Superiors. 

How to Greet a Patient. 

Q. How can you best greet a patient on seeing him the 
first time? 

On entering the room the first time, a pleasant look 
or bow are sufficient. 

Q. What will make you acquainted with the patient? 
The first service skillfully rendered will make you ac- 
quainted with the patient and often confirm or destroy his 
confidence in you. 



8 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. Where should the Sister not sit in the sick room? 
She should not sit where the patient cannot avoid 
seeing her; she should not appear to watch him, though she 
must observe him constantly. 

Things that Disturb the Patient. 

Q. What may whispering in a sick room be called under 
certain circumstances? 

There may be circumstances in which a whispered 
conversation may be called cruelty against the patient. 
Q. Why? 

Because it is impossible that the patient's attention 
should not be strained to hear what is whispered. 
Q. What is also injurious for the same reason? 

Walking en tip toes and moving stealthily about the 
room. 

Q. What will seldom annoy the patient? 

A low, distinct tone, when conversation is necessary, 
and a light step will seldom annoy. 

Q. Will a patient easily complain of things that annoy 
him? 

No; a patient will often refrain from complaining of 
these things, lest he should be thought selfish. 

Q. What must a Sister do, therefore, in regard to these 
things? 

She must, all the more, take care to protect the 
patient from them. 

Q. What other things disturb a patient? 

Nearly all movements not pertaining to his physical 
welfare and comfort, as 

Sitting on the bed, the rattling of newspapers, the 
turning over of leaves with a snap, the swinging of a rocking 
chair, sewing, and the clicking of knitting needles, one or 
all, are sometimes seriously annoying to the patient. 
Q. What injures a patient mostly? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 



Unnecessary or unexplained noise, though slight, in- 
jures a sick person much more than necessary noise of a much 
greater amount. 

How to Promote the Peace of Mind and Serenity of 

the Patient. 

Q. How can a Sister promote the peace of mind and 
serenity of her patient? 

She can do this by moving about quietly, promptly 
putting things in their places, knowing the right thing to do. 
Q. How should she do all these things? 

Without any hurry. 
Q. What should the Sister never ask of the patient? 
The Sister should not call upon the patient to give his 
decision on anything, or let him be startled by anyone or 
anything. 

Q. What should the Sister always anticipate? 

She should anticipate little wants, but never question 
in regard to them. 

Q. What should the Sister not do if the patient is de- 
lirious? 

She should not contradict him. 
Q. But what should she do in this case? 

She should humor his notions quietly, whatever they 
may be, or say nothing unless questioned. 

Q. What must be carefully avoided in fever delirium? 

All appearance of fear. 
Q. How .should a Sister listen to the patient? 

The Sister should listen attentively to the patient 
when he speaks, and never ask him to repeat. 

Q. Is it advisable for a Sister to speak to the patient 
from a distance? 

Never, from a distance, or standing behind him. 



10 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Things that are Never to be Spoken of Before a 

Patient. 

Q. About what may a Sister never speak to a patient? 
She may on no account speak of the sicknesses and 
diseases of other patients, or of disagreeable hospital experi- 
ences, operations performed, and sufferings witnessed, news- 
paper reports of crimes and calamities, or anything that may 
excite painful emotions. 

Q. How should every conversation of the Sister with the 
patient be? 

It should be cheerful, brief, not too loud. 
Q. From what should the Sister divert the patient 
always? 

She should divert the patient always from gloomy 
thoughts, and avoid too much talking of any kind. 

The Symptoms of a Sick Person not a Topic of Con- 
versation. 

Q. Of what else should a Sister never speak in the pres- 
ence of the patient? 

She should never speak of the symptoms unless ques- 
tioned by the doctor. 

Q. What more should the Sister avoid? 

Never give an unfavorable opinion of his condition to 
any one in his hearing. 

Low Spirited Patients. 

• Q. What should a Sister do with a low-spirited patient? 
If she can conscientiously encourage a patient, she 
should do so. 

Q. How should she best do this? 

Keep him cheerful and free from anxiety. 
Q. What should the Sister do on her part? 

She should never look gloomy or anxious herself, or 
give up hope while there is life, and always be kind and meek. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 11 



Insensible Patients. 

Q. What should a Sister never say in the presence of aa 
insensible patient? 

Though a patient seems insensible or in a stupor,, 
never say anything loud in his presence which he ought not 
to hear. 

Q. Why? 

His hearing may be acute, though he may not be able 
to speak or move. 

Duties Towards the Doctor. 

Q. What duties has a sister towards the doctor? 

She must implicitly obey all his directions, carefully 
report in writing every symptom and the exact history of the 
day since his last visit. 

Q. What must she encourage on the patient's part? 

She must encourage full confidence in the doctor on> 
the part of the patient. 

Q. What must a Sister never discuss? 

She must never discuss the doctor's treatment of the 
case, or other doctor's treatment of similar cases. 

A Sister not Justified in Leaving a Case Without 

Permission. 

Q. Is a Sister allowed to leave a case whenever she 
pleases? 

Having once assumed the responsibility of a patient* 
it is her duty to remain with the patient as long as she can 
be of any use, unless obedience or her own health obliges her 
to leave. 

Q. What should she do if the case has become chronic or 
incurable? 

In this case the Sister is not obliged to remain, but 
she should follow the directions of her Superiors. 



12 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. How long is a Sister allowed to remain out nursing 
without special permission? 

One week at a time, except there is a probability that 
the patient will soon die. 

Suggestions for a Sister. 

Q. What should a Sister never speak of on her return 
from nursing? 

Tales out of school. 
Q. What may a Sister never talk about? 

Never about her own exploits in nursing, personal 
items of physician, or other things out of the hospital, neither 
before the family, nor single patients, or in recreation. 
Q. What ought a Sister feel regarding all this? 

She should remember that gossip, though it may 
gratify curiosity for the moment, will not, in the end, increase 
the respect for the Sister. 

Q. How should a Sister be in her mind and manners? 
A Sister should have in her thoughts, the purity of 
intention, and in her manners, be meek and firm, in her 
words, discreet and prudent. 

Q. What must a Sister preserve in all occurrences of her 
vocation? 

She must preserve purity of heart, the modesty of her 
eyes, and guard her tongue. 

Concerning Callers. 

Q. What will a Sister never allow whilst on duty? 

No sister will ever allow her duties to be interrupted 
or neglected by callers. 

Q. In what points must a Sister be extremely careful? 
In the matter of so-called private friendships, for 
they are forbidden by the rule and dangerous to virtue. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 13 

Q. What are often the consequences of such friendships? 

Every woman, and more so a religious, will injure her 

reputation for life, if she associates with unworthy persons, 

men or women, or with those to whom the slightest suspicion 

attaches. 

Q. How should a sister associate with men? 

Her conduct should be modest, earnest and brief, not 
more than what is necessary. 

When Death is Coming. 

Q. When can a Sister be a great comfort and aid in a 
family where she is nursing? 

When it is clear that the patient is dying, then quiet 
self-possession and sincere sympathy will be of the first im- 
portance. 

Q. What should a Sister do in this case? 

She should do all she can for the patient, and then, if 
not needed, stand aside, that the family may be nearest to 
him. 

Q. When death has come, is there any need of hurry? 
When death has come, there is no need, as in hospital 
wards, to hurry along the arrangements. 

Q. How long should the relatives be left undisturbed? 

Until they leave the room voluntarily. 
Q. What may be done then, and how should it be done? 
Then a Sister may do what is necessary. She should 
be very careful that everything is done tenderly, and that 
great care is taken against exposure. 

Q. What can the Sister do after the corpse is laid, out? 
She should leave the room, clothing, etc., in perfect 
order, and put out of sight medicine or other traces of the 
sickness. 

Q. What should be done with the bedclothes, etc? 

All bedding, towels and clothing should be taken to 
the laundry; the windows in the room should be opened wide, 
the shutters closed. 



14 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Special Obligations for a Sister to Consider all Con- 
fidential Communications of the Patient Sacred. 

Q. What is a Sister bound to hold sacred? 

She is bound to hold sacred the confidences which she 
may have received from a patient, and never betray any 
family secrets, and her good reputation must follow her in 
this respect wherever she goes. 

Q. What will be the consequence if a Sister is not careful 
in talking about family affairs? 

If it is once known that a Sister likes to gossip, then 
she will bring disgrace upon the hospital where she comes 
from, and the religious life in general. 

Telling Sad News. 

Q. What is the Sister sometimes called upon to tell the 

patient? 

It may sometimes happen that the Sister is called 

upon to tell the patient that death is near. 

Q. Without whose permission should this never be done? 

Without the doctor's permission. 

Q. In what case should she not do it at all? 

If there be any member of the family, or clergyman, 

or other person to whom the duty rightfully belongs. 

Q. If a Sister must speak, how should she do it? 

She should speak with the greatest possible gentle- 
ness. 

Bandaging. 

Q. What is the first thing to be shown in bandaging 
instruction? 

To roll a bandage by hand. 
Q. How is it done? 

It is taken into the right hand, the end of the strip 
is folded over upon itself, until you have a little roil stiff 
enough to keep in shape. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 15 

Q. In which hand is the roll taken? 

It is taken into the right hand between the thumb 
and middle finger; then turn it, let the bandage pass over the 
back of the left hand between the forefinger and thumb, and 
be pressed with the thumb of the other hand against the roll. 
Q. With what part of the human body should the 
teacher begin this instruction? 

First with the hand, then with the arm. 
Q. How long should this be practiced? 

Until every novice has acquired a facility to make and 
reverse the bandages, and the reverses are even and straight. 
Q. What next? 

Then the elbow is bandaged, the upper arm, the 
single and double shoulder-brace, the fingers, the foot, the 
heel, finally the head and the eyes. 
Q. What are bandages used for? 

To hold the dressings in place, to give support, or 
prevent motion. 

Q. How shall a bandage be removed? 

A bandage must be removed with the greatest care, 
without hurry, without jerking, so that the afflicted part is 
not concussed, which would cause to the patient pain, or hem- 
orrhage, or dislocate a set fracture. 

Q. What must be done if the bandage adheres to the 
wound? 

In that case it must be moistened with an antiseptic 
solution to loosen it. 

Q. What bandages are commonly used? 

Roller bandages, many-tailed bandages, and T band- 
ages. 

Q. What are roller bandages? 

They are strips of muslin, flannel or gauze, from half 

an inch to eight inches wide, of different lengths, tightly rolled 

upon themselves. 

Q. What must be trimmed off the bandages? 

Loose threads and the selvages. 



16 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What kind of a bandage must be used for moist or 
wet dressings? 

Of material that has been washed before. 
Q. Why? 

Because inconvenience may arise from shrinkage. 
Q. How can bandages be pieced? 

Lay the two flat ends on each other, overlapping for 
an inch, and sew with long stitches. 
Q. How should it be rolled? 

As tight as possible. 
Q. How should you unwind the bandage in putting on a 
roller bandage? 

No faster than necessary, keeping the roll close to 
the body. 

Q. How must a well-fitting bandage lie? 

Smooth, without wrinkles, making an even pressure. 
Q. How must they be applied? 

Not too loose, or it will slip off, and not too tight, or 
it will be painful and impede the circulation. 

Q. What bandage is used when it is important to avoid 
motion? 

A many-tailed bandage. 
Q. Of what is this made? 

Of a piece of muslin torn into strips from each side, to 
within an inch or two of the centre. 

Q. What bandage is an improvement upon this? 

The bandage of Scultetus. 
Q. How can this be made? 

Take a long strip of muslin, sew across it at right 
angles other strips overlapping each other by two-thirds their 
width. 

Q. What other bandage is frequently used? 

A T bandage, being called so because it has the form 
of the roman letter T. 

Q. What is a sling or triangular bandage? 

It is either a square or three-cornered piece of muslin. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 17 

Q. What are rubber bandages used for? 

To reduce or prevent swelling and give support. 
Q. How should they be put on? 

Without any reverses, and special care must be taken 
to avoid getting them too tight. 

Q. What besides these may be used for the same purpose? 
An elastic stocking is usually used in case of varicose 
veins. 

Q. What is another means of affording support, or pro- 
tection, to a limp or other parts? 

By strapping with adhesive plaster. 
Q. How must the strips be cut? 

Lengthwise. 
Q. How can they be warmed, if necessary? 

By holding the plain side over a flame or hot water. 
Q. What must be done with the part or limb to which 
the plaster is to be applied? 

It must be thoroughly cleaned and shaved. 
Q. In what case is strapping sometimes employed in the 
place of bandaging? 

In cases of fractured ribs, or whenever it is desirable 
to limit the movements of the chest. 
Q. What advantage has strapping? 

It can be employed to one side only. 
Q. How are plaster of paris bandages made? 

They are prepared by rubbing into coarse gauze or 
muslin rollers as much of the plaster of paris as they will 
carry. 

Q. Where must they be kept if they are not used at once? 

In tin boxes. 
Q. What kind of plaster of paris bandages are mostly 
used at the present time? 

Such as are bought already prepared and packed each 
one alone in air-tight tin boxes. 

Q. What must be done with the limb before the plaster 
of paris cast is put on? 

9. 



18 THE NURSING SISTER. 

It must be thoroughly cleaned and, if necessary, 
shaved, then a soft stocking or piece of soft flannel wrapped 
around it. 

Q. What is done with the bandage before it is applied? 
As soon as the doctor is ready, it is immersed into 
water until well saturated, then squeezed out and handed to 
the doctor. 

Q. What adds to setting of plaster of paris? 

A little salt put in the water. 
Q. Is the salt always used? 

No, some surgeons say it spoils the cast — follow the 
directions of the surgeon. 

Q. How long does it generally take before they are per- 
fectly dry? 

About twelve hours, more or less, according to thick- 
ness. 

Q. What is required when a plaster of paris jacket is 
applied? 

A frame, in which the patient can be placed so that 
the feet barely touch the floor. 

Q. What is put on the patient before the bandages are 
applied? 

A thin, tight-fitting, woven undershirt. 
Q. How long must the broken limb be kept perfectly 
quiet after applying the plaster bandages? 
Until the cast is firm. 
Q. What may be used to keep it in position? 

Sandbags filled about three-quarters full of fine sand. 
Q. What will they hasten if they are heated? 

The drying. 
Q. When a plaster splint is to be removed, what will 
facilitate the process? 

By moistening it along the proposed line of incision 
with diluted hydrochloric acid. 

Q. How long is the cast left on? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 19 



Until the fracture is healed, or as long as the afflicted 
part needs a support. 

Q. With what is it taken off? 

With a small saw or scissors made for this purpose. 
Q. What is necessary if there is a wound beneath the 
plaster cast? 

That a piece of the plaster is cut out where still soft, 
so that the secretion can escape and the wound be dressed. 

Q. What must a Sister get ready when a plaster of paris 
cast is to be applied? 

Warm and cold water, plaster of paris bandages, dry 
plaster of paris, aprons, towels and, if needed, a frame and a 
stocking sleeve or undershirt. 



20 THE NURSING SISTER. 



CHAPTER SECOND. 



The Sick Room. 

Q. What room is the best for a patient? 

A room on the south side of the house which has an 
open fire-place. 

Q. What should a Sister do if such a room can be had? 
Should there be such a room to which the patient can 
be removed, the Sister should pleasantly suggest the change 
to the family. 

Q. What should be done if the fire-place be stopped up? 
If the chimney is stopped up with a tire-board, news- 
paper, blower or bunch of straw, the Sister should at once re- 
move it and make the chimney free. 
Q. How should the room be kept? 

Bright and cheerful, unless the condition of the 
patient requires it darkened. 

Q. Should the sunlight be left in or not? 

Let the sunlight in freely, always shading the 
patient's face. 

Q. What should the Sister do if the bed faces the 
window? 

She should turn it around or, better, set up a screen. 
Q. What is very trying on the eyes of a patient? 

Bars and streaks from ill-fitting blinds are very trying 
on the eyes. 

Q. Should the bed stand up close to the wall? 

The bed should be pulled out from the wall as far as 
possible, that the air may have an access to it from all sides, 
and the Sister may move easily about it. 

Q. If the physician prefers a darkened room, what should 
the Sister do? 



THE NURSIXG SISTER. 21 

The Sister must accustom herself to moving about 
quietly in it and let no consideration for her own convenience 
lead her to object to the order of the doctor. 
Q. What should be carried out of the room? 

All ornaments and anything not needed, for it will 
only make a lodging place for the dust. 

Q. What should be done with rocking chairs? 

Take away rocking chairs, that visitors may not be 
tempted to swing in them. 

Q. How should the washstand be kept? 

Everything about the washstand should be kept clean. 
Q. Where should the various little things be kept? 

If there is no adjoining room or closet in which the 
various little matters which you require in your work may be 
put, then keep them out of sight behind a screen. 

Private Rooms in a Hospital. 
Q. How should the walls of a private room in a hos- 
pital be? 

Either whitewashed or painted in a light color. 
Q. What may hang on the walls? 

Nothing but a crucifix. 
Q. How shall the floor be? 

The floor should be oiled, varnished or painted and a 
rug alongside of the bed. 

Q. What furniture should it contain? 

A bedstead with springs (iron one preferred), mat- 
tress and bed-clothes, wardrobe, bureau, washstand, two 
chairs, easy chair, bedside-table and commode. 

Q. What kind of goods may be used for cushions, tidies 
-and covers? 

Only washable goods. 

Hospital Wards. 

Q. What is absolutely necessary in a hospital ward? 
The first requisite is scrupuious cleanliness. 



22 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. Why? 

1. Because in a ward there are a greater number of 
lives at stake. 

2. No amount of ventilation will keep the air fresh. 
in a ward that is not clean. 

Q. What is dust in a ward? 

Not only dirt, but danger. 
Q. Of what does dust consist? 

It consists largely of organic matter, which must be- 
taken away, not merely stirred up and redistributed. 
Q How can this be done? 

By carefully dusting and sweeping the floor with a 
damp broom, with long strokes, and washing the floor fre- 
quently with clear water which cannot be changed too often. 
Q, What is the consequence, if a ward is swept carelessly 
and clouds of dust are raised? 

The dust will be driven over the beds and into the 
eyes and mouths of its unfortunate occupants, who cannot get 
out of the way, but can only stay and be choked, or their 
lungs affected by poisonous germs. 

Q. What must be immediately removed from the wards? 

All vessels must be immediately removed upon use, 

and thoroughly cleaned. Never bring a slop pale into the 

ward; all waste matters, even water used for washing, should 

be at once carried out. 

Q. What should at once be removed besides this? 

All soiled clothes. Before sending them to the laun- 
dry, see that there be no pins left in them, that they are dis- 
tinctly marked with the letter of the ward, and if private 
property, with the number of the room or ward and name of 
the patient. Roll every dirty thing in a bundle by them- 
selves. 

Q. What takes the first and what takes the second place 
in a ward? 

Cleanliness, everywhere next to Godliness, takes pre- 
cedence in a hospital ward for allother virtues: order, heaven's 



THE NURSING SISTER. 23 

first law, has a secondary but still very important place. A 
well kept ward is characterized by neatness and uniformity. 

Q. What adds a great deal to the attractive appearance 
of a ward? 

A little care to have things straight. The beds 
should be in an exact line, chairs, tables and rugs at the 
same angle to each other. No clothes may be tucked about 
the beds or flung over the chairs. 

Q. What must be inspected daily? 

The bedside tables, and no rubbish allowed to accum- 
ulate in the drawer. 

Q. What is often the consequence if this is neglected? 
The patient will be apt to stow away dirty clothes, 
remains of meals, dead flowers, apple peels or any refuse that 
may need to be disposed of and he don't know how. 

Bedside Tables. 

Q. What should be placed for the patient's use at the 
head of the bed? 

A small, light table with a drawer. 
Q. What should be placed on this table? 

A glass of water or of cracked ice, covered with a 
saucer or a napkin. 

Q. What else may be placed upon this table if the case 
permits? 

An orange nicely prepared in little sections; just large 
enough for a mouthful, or any other ripe fruit, if the doctor 
permits. 

Q. Upon what should the fruit be placed? 

Over a bowl in which there is ice. 
Q. Is there anything else that may be allowed to be 
placed upon this table? 

A few very fresh flowers, nothing else. 



24 the nursing sister. 

Stationary Washstand. 

Q. What should be done if there is a stationary wash- 
stand in the room? 

If there be a stationary washstand in the room, put 
in the plug, and fill the basin full of water, which must be 
changed from time to time. 

Q. What may be stuffed into the basin? 

A towel, and then cover it with a stiff paper or board. 
Q. Should anything be emptied in this basin? 

Never should anything be emptied into it, nor should 
the basin be used in any way. 

Reasons for Not Using Stationary Washstands. 

Q. Why should no water, used for any purpose in a sick 
room, be emptied into a stationary washstand. 

The water you bathe your patient in, or use for any 
purpose about the sick room, is very impure, and if emptied 
into the basin will form a slime round the pipes, and the im- 
purity will escape into the room again in the form of foul air. 

If the waste pipe of a stationary basin is defective, 
sooner or later sewer gas may rise through it from other 
parts of the house or from the streets and poison the air of 
the sick room. 

Slop Pails. 
Q. Should slop pails be allowed in a room? 

Slop pails should never be allowed in a sick room. 
Q. How should vessels be carried out? 

All vessels should be carried out of the room covered 
with a towel, then emptied and washed immediately, and 
towels kept constantly clean for this purpose. 

Bedpans and Other Vessels. 

Q. Where should bedpans and other urinals never be 
left? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 25 

Never allow vessels, bedpans or urinals to stand, 
where they can be seen, either by patients or by persons com- 
ing into the room. 

Q. Where should they be kept? 

In a closet or adjoining room, if possible, and never 
under the bed. 

Q. Where can they be placed for instant use? 

If they must be ready for instant use, put them near 
the bed and throw a clean towel over them. 
Q. What should be kept in the vessels? 

Always keep a deodorizer in them to destroy the odor. 
Q. What shall be put in the water in which they are 
washed? 

Put a little washing soda or soap in the water. 
Q. What should be done with vessels before bringing 
them to the patient? 

Vessels should be warmed before they are brought to 
the patient, if the weather is cold. 

Q. What makes a splendid deodorizer? 

A pound of sulphate of iron (copperas) dissolved in 
two quarts of rainwater, makes an excellent deodorizer, and 
has no disagreeable smell. 
Q. How can it be used? 

Pour a little into the vessels after washing them, and 
keep it in them. 

Q. What effect has this on towels and bed-clothing? 
It will stain them. 

A Disinfectant for Vessels. 

Q. What will make a good disinfectant? 

The following mixture: Water, two and one-hall 
gallons; sulphate of iron, two pounds; carbolic acid, foui 
pounds. 

Q. How can it be used? 



26 THE NURSING SISTER. 



In communicable diseases, in typhoid fever and 
dysentery, always keep it in the vessels, and pour some in the 
closet every day. 

Room Temperature. 

Q. How high should the thermometer in a sick room be? 
Never let the thermometer rise above 70 degrees, un- 
less in special cases, such as croup, when the doctor's direc- 
tions must be followed. 

Q. How high should temperature be at night? 

From 60 to 65 degrees, unless the doctor directs other- 
wise; ask him about it. 

Ventilation. 

Q. In what does the proper ventilation of a room consist? 
The proper ventilation of a room consists in trying 
constantly to renew the used and foul air through fresh air 
from outside. 

Q. What maybe done for this purpose? 

Keep the window farthest from the patient down at 
least an inch from the top, so that fresh air can constantly 
come in. 

Q. What should be done besides this? 

The window farthest from the patient should be 
opened wide at least three times a day — morning, noon and 
evening, in dry weather. 

Q. What special care should be taken during this time 
in regard to the patient? 

That the patient is protected from draught by cover- 
ing and keeping him covered with extra blankets until the 
temperature again rises to 68 or 70 degrees after ventilating. 
Q. Is ventilation of great importance in hospitals? 
It is of the utmost importance 

1. Because also in hospitals fresh air is half the med- 
icine, while foul air is almost poison. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 27 

2. Because, on account of the many patients in hos- 
pitals, the foul air is apt to accumulate and injure all. 

Q. How can the ventilation in a hospital be best regu- 
lated? 

Unless there is a special mechanism for ventilation in 
the halls, wards and private rooms of the hospital, an in- 
telligent and prudent Sister should be appointed who has to 
attend to the ventilation in the whole house, or in the differ- 
ent departments, at least three times a day in the rooms and 
five times in the halls, with the above mentioned precautions. 

Q. Are cold rooms always well ventilated? 

By no means; the air in a cold room may be very im- 
pure. 

Q. What else can at times be suggested for good venti- 
lation? 

That a door be swung rapidly and quietly back and 
forth; it will force the bad air out of the room, and draw in 
the fresh air from the window, which is down at the top. 

Q. Would it be sufficient for ventilation to leave the 
door of a sick room into the hall open? 

No; you cannot ventilate a room by merely having 
the door open into the hall. Only the stale air comes into 
the room, and the noise is heard from the whole house. 

Q. In what case may the door into the adjoining room 
be left open? 

If the adjoining room can be ventilated through an 
open window. 

Q. For what time would this suffice? 
This would be sufficient for night. 

Fumigating. 

Q. What is to be said about fumigating? 

That the burning of pastilles, or coffee, the sprink- 
ling of perfume, etc., does not purify the air; it simply covers 
the bad air and renders germs harmless. 

Q. From where alone does clean air come? 



28 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Only from the outside of the house. 
Q. How can you protect a patient when ventilating the 
room? 

By placing a screen before the window or arranging 
the blinds or shutters so there be no direct draught on the 
patient, 

Q. If there is an open fireplace in the room, what should 
be done? 

Put a lighted lamp or candle in it. 
Q. For what purpose? 

This will draw the foul air up the chimney, while the 
fresh air from the window takes its place. 

Q. "What will do, if there cannot be a constant fire kept 
up in the fireplace? 

A few sticks, lighted several times a day, and the 
lamp kept burning at all other times in the chimney, will 
secure constant ventilation. 

Q. How often should the windows be opened wide in a 
sick room? 

If the case permits, three times a day, at least. 
Q. If this cannot be done, what may be done instead? 
An adjoining room can be filled with fresh air, wait- 
ing until it is warmed a little, then opening the door and let- 
ting the fresh air into the sick room. 

Q. In what case is the patient not allowed to breathe in 
the cold air? 

In all cases that involve the throat, lungs or nasal 
passages, croup, pneumonia, typhoid, sore throat, diphtheria, 
scarlet fever and measles, which occasion to be throat 
troubles. In all these cases the patient must be covered and 
remain so until the fresh air be sufficiently warmed. 

Putting the Room in Order in Private Nursing. 

Q. Whose duty is it to keep the patient's room in order 
and what does it require? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 29 

It is the Sister's duty, and requires good management 
and common sense. 

Q. At what time should it be done? 

Choose the time when the patient will be the least 
disturbed, which is generally after breakfast. 

Q. What must the Sister avoid if she intends to put the 
room in order? 

She must never move about restless or fussy. 
Q. What should be used for dusting? 

Never use a feather duster; but a cloth. 
Q. Where is the rug put? 

The rug should be hung in the air. Then dip a cloth 
in water and ring it out dry and pass it quickly over the carpet. 
Q. Where is this also necessary? 

Under the bed; for this purpose the cloth can be 
fastened around the broom. 

Q. What should be put around the bed of the patient 
while the moving is going on? 
A screen. 
Q. When can the room be cleaned thoroughly? 

Only when the patient can be moved out for a while. 

Where Bottles, Spoons and Glasses Be Kept. 

Q. Where should glasses, spoons, etc., be kept? 

All these things should be kept out of sight on a table. 
Q. What is to be done with the boxes and bottles if the 
medicine is changed? 

The boxes and bottles which are no longer needed 
should be set aside in a closet at once so as to avoid mistakes. 
Q. How can you avoid the staining of spoons from the 
medicine? 

By having a bowl of water with the medicine and 
keeping the spoons in it. 

Q. What is mostly used for giving medicine? 
A graduated glass. 



30 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. In what case must a spoon be used*? 

When the medicine is oily. 
Q. What should always be on hand with the medicine? 
One or two cloths to wipe the glass or spoon after it 
is washed. 

Q. If you have a medicine glass for one person alone, 
how often should it be washed? 
As often as it is used. 
Q. Where should all washing of spoons and glasses be 
done? 

Out of the patient's room. 
Q, Why? 

Because the rattling is very annoying for the patient. 

Bedmaking. 
Q. What is one of the most important 'daily duties of a 
Sister of Charity? 

The making of the bed. 
Q. What does the good making up of a bed impart to the 
patient? 

It imparts a great relief to the patient if his bed is 
arranged and made up well. 

Q. How should you make up a bed for a patient who is 
not very ill? 

1. To make up the bed for a patient who is able and 
allowed to leave the bed, you first help the patient out of bed 
and place him, well propped and protected with covers 
against taking cold, in a chair near the bed. 

2. Take the bedclothes, one by one, out of the bed- 
stead and shake them up well. 

Q. What shall be done if the bed has a straw sack? 

It must be shaken up well; if anything is soiled it 
must be removed and the pillows arranged in the proper way. 
Q. What is to be done if the bed has a mattress and bol- 
ster? 

They must be turned every day. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 31 



Q. What is to be done with soiled sheets? 

Soiled sheets should be removed and replaced by clean 
ones, which are to be spread straight and smooth upon the 
"bed, to prevent bed-sores. 

Q. What must be put in the bed of a patient who passes 
the discharges into the bed? 

In such a case it is necessary that a rubber sheet and 
a draw-sheet be placed in the bed. 

Q. How shall the sheets be kept straight? 

By tucking them securely under the mattress or 
straw sack. 

Q. How is the top sheet turned? 

The upper sheet is turned down over the cover, and 
then turned down with the covers towards the foot-end of 
the bed. 

Q. • How is the patient then returned to bed? 

The patient is then brought carefully and easy to bed. 
Q. What care must there be taken in regard to covers by 
patients with fever? 

That they are not covered in an unreasonable manner 
with heavy covers. 

Q. What is to be done if it is impossible for the patient 
to sit up? 

Such patients are placed on a couch or stretcher. 
Q. What is required when a patient is to be laid upon a 
stretcher? 

To raise a patient carefully from his bed and put him 
on a stretcher, or change him from one bed into another, it 
requires several Sisters and certain manipulations. 

Q. Where is the stretcher placed when a patient is to be 
placed upon it? 

The stretcher is set near the side of the bed, so that 
the head-end of the stretcher stands even with the foot-end 
of the bed. 

Q. How is the patient then lifted upon it? 



32 THE NURSING SISTER. 

1. One of the Sisters clasps the head and shoulders 
of the patient, while the patient supports his hands and arms 
on the shoulder of the Sister. 

2. Another Sister clasps the hips, a third the knees 
and limbs. 

Q. When and how is the patient lifted? 

All three lift the patient at the same time, make a 
turn, so that the position of his head corresponds with the 
head-end of the stretcher. 

Q. How should the patient be lowered? 

The patient should be lowered easy and gently. 
Q. In what way should the patient be put back to bed? 
In the same manner as he was brought from the bed 
to the stretcher. This is also to be observed when the 
patient is to be brought into the bathtub. 

How to Change the Bedclothes. 

Q. How can you change the under sheets? 

Fold the under sheet, then remove the soiled sheet 
with the same motion which puts on the fresh one. 
Q. What must first be done with the sheet? 

It must first be warmed and aired, then fold half of it 
up small and flat through its whole length, lay the folded part 
next and close to the patient, pushing before it the soiled 
under sheet folded in the same way. 

Q. How can the sheets then be put under the patient? 
Press down the mattress close by the patient and 
gently work the two folds, the soiled and the clean one, under 
the back. The head and the feet can be slightly raised to 
allow the folds to pass; after this is done you have only to 
pull the sheet smooth and tuck it in. 

Q. What should be done with the pillows? 

They should be changed several times a day; slip a 
cool fresh one under the patient's head and take away the 
warm one. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 33 

Q. If the bed is wide, what can be done for the patient's 
comfort? 

The patient can be gently moved from one side to the 
other, and always have a fresh one ready for the night. 
Q. How can the upper sheet be changed? 

Air and warm the sheet and then roll it in its width; 
pass it under the sheet which you ire to change, commencing 
at the foot of the bed and bring it up as smoothly as possible, 
unrolling it as you move it up. 

Q. "What shall be done with the soiled sheet when the 
clean one is over the patient? 

It should be drawn down and removed at the foot end 
of the bed. 

Q. What can be avoided in this way? 

Removing the blankets and chilling the patient. 

Securing a Fresh Feeling Bed With a Few Sheets. 

Q. Ought the sheets be changed often? 

Sheets ought to be changed oftener than they com- 
monly are. 

Q. What is to be done if the supply is limited? 

Then keep at least two upper sheets in use at one 
time, and alternate them, taking the one that has been in use 
all day and hanging it in another room to air. 

Q. What sheet is to be put over the patient at night? 
The sheet which has been hanging in another room 
to air since morning, but care must be taken that it is not 
damp or chilly. 

Q. For what purpose is a fresh sheet to be taken for the 

night? 

It will help much to secure a good night for the 

patient. 

Q. What should be done with the patient as soon as he is 

well enough to be lifted? 

—3 



34 THE NURSING SISTER. 



He should then be lifted upon a lounge: then carry 
the mattress and pillows and bedding out of the room and air 
them by an open window. 

Q. What is the best covering for a bed? 

Glean sheets and blankets; no heavy quilt or counter- 
pane should be used. 

Bed for Long Occupation. 

Q. With what must a bed be protected in case of serious 

illness? 

With a rubber sheet and a draw-sheet, which must be 

large enough to be laid across the bed under the patient and 
be tucked in well at the sides. 

Q. Why is the draw-sheet used? 

Because it can easily be removed and changed with 
very little disturbance to the patient, and is necessary also in 
order to protect him from the heating effect of the rubber 
cloth, which, if too near the person, promotes weakening per- 
spiration and bed-sores. 

Airing Clothing, Etc. 
Q. Where should the airing of the clothing be done? 
Ko clothing in use, no flannel or clamp towels, should 
be aired in the sick room. Soiled articles of all kinds should 
at once be removed. 

Q. How many night-dresses should be kept in use? 

Two; one for the day and one for the night. Always 
hang the one you take off by an open window for awhile, and 
warm it before using it again. 

Q. How many sets of blankets should be kept in use? 
Two, if possible; airing one set in the open air while 
the other is in use. 

Cleaning of the Rooms and Corridor. 
1. Dusting. 
Q. When should a room be dusted? 



THE CURSING SISTER. 35 

The room should be dusted after sweeping and before 
mopping. 

Q. With what should it be done? 

It can be done with two dusting cloths, by first dust- 
ing with one and then using the other; or, with one dusting 
cloth and a hairbrush. 

Q. What should never be used for dusting? 

Feather dusters. 
Q. For what reason? 

Because they only serve to whirl the dust around in 
the room, but do not remove it, and therefore act very in- 
juriously upon the lungs. 

Q. If the washstand and the small table at the head of 
the bed are covered with oil-cloth, how can they be kept clean? 
They must be washed off daily, likewise the articles 
which are upon the washstand. 
2. Mopping the floor. 
Q. How cm a room be thoroughly cleaned? 

If the room is to be mopped, all furniture, tables, 
chairs, etc., are moved from their places, or, if possible, carried 
out of the room; then wipe up to the washboard with a clean, 
soft cloth. 

Q. How is the floor mopped? 

The floor is mopped with a coarse mop-rag and a stick, 
but great care must be taken not to touch the washboard, and 
thereby spoil the paint. 

Q. How should you wring out the cloth? 

The first time it should be fairly wet, the second time 
wring it out tight and rub it over the floor vigorously. 

Q. What should never be left standing after mopping? 
Pools of water 



36 THE NURSING SISTER. 



THIRD CHAPTER. 



The Patient. 

Q. How can you lift a very ill patient from one bed into 
another? 

The bed should be made ready for use and pushed 
close to the one occupied. Two, or better, four persons, should 
then take by its corners the sheet upon which the patient lies, 
and very slowly and gently lift and place him on the fresh 
bed, removing the sheet after he has rested awhile. 

Q. If there be only one Sister to do this, how can she 
proceed? 

Then the clean bed must be of the same height as the 
one occupied. A large rubber cloth should be laid under the 
patient, who is drawn with it to the edge of the bed. 
Q. How far must the rubber cloth extend? 

It must extend over the fresh bed and make a smooth 
surface, to cross which the patient can easily be pulled on a 
drawsheet to the fresh bed, and the rubber cloth may be re- 
moved. 

Q. Should a patient help himself? 

Never, if he is very ill. Never let him sit up or turn 
himself alone. Make it your rule to save his strength in 
every way. 

Q. What should be done if a helpless patient has slipped 
down in bed? 

He should then be put gently on his pillows again, but 
he must never be dragged. 

Q. How can he be lifted upon the pillows? 

If the patient is strong enough, he can clasp his 
hands around the neck of the Sister, by this, distributing his 



THE NURSING SISTER. 37 

weight more equally. The Sister will generally find it easy 
to gently lift him up an inch from the bed and raise him upon 
the pillows. 

Q. What should the Sister do if the patient is too heavy? 

If the patient is too heavy and too helpless to use his 

arms, it is better to drag the sheet upon which he is lying up 

towards the bed head, and cover the space left at the foot 

with another sheet. * 

Q. How should a patient be lifted on the night-chair? 
The patient should clasp his hands round the neck of 
the Sister, and in this position gently be moved along towards 
the chair. 

Q. How should the patient be helped back to bed? 

It can be managed in the same way; the patient being 
seated on the edge of the bed, the feet can be lifted from the 
floor with the right hand, and the body be supported with the 
left hand, and in this manner be brought into the right 
position. 

Q. How can this be done if there are two Sisters. 

Then one sister should place herself behind the 
patient and pass her arms under his arms, and clasp her 
hands over his chest. His head and shoulders will in this 
way rest against the Sister's chest. 

Q. How does the second Sister take hold? 

She clasps her hands under the patient's knees and 
raises them a little, then both lift him at the same moment 
and bring him into the desired position. 

Q. How must this all be done? 

This must all be done slowly, and care must be taken 
to put him down gently without any jar or twist. 

Q. What should not be attempted if the patient is 
heavy? 

Taking him out of the bed should not be attempted. 
In this case the bed-pan or urinal must be used in place of the 
night-chair. 



38 the nursing sister. 

Arranging the Pillows. 

Q. How should the pillows be placed? 

They should be placed so as to raise the head, and 
also to support the shoulders, so that the lungs can breathe 
freely. 

Q. What care must be taken in propping a patient up? 
See that the first pillow is well pulled down to the 
small of the back. Commence with that pillow, and put the 
others each one behind the last. 
Q. What will this prevent? 

It will kpep them from slipping. 
Q. What is often very useful for the patient's comfort? 
One or two small pillows or sofa-cushions, which can 
be covered with a linen case and moved about easily, just as 
any pirt needs a support. 

Cleaning the Patient. 

1. Washing. 

Q. How can a patient be washed? 

If the patient is not too weak, and can sit up, then he 
is washed while he is sitting up, and also combed. 
Q. With what is the patient generally washed? 

Face and hands are generally washed with tepid 
water. 

Q. In what cases rrfust this be omitted? 

If the patient is afflicted with a rash, erysipeles. 
measles, scarlet fever, small-pox, etc. 

2. Bathing. 

Q. What directions must be followed in bathing the 
patient? 

The doctor's directions must be strictly followed. 
Q. How are baths distinguished? 

We distinguish full baths or local baths— that iSy 
bathing certain parts of the body. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 39 

Q. How is a full or plunge bath given? 

If a patient has strength enough to walk, he will go 
to the bathroom and take his bath there, precisely as pre- 
scribed by the doctor in regard to temperature, time and mix- 
ture. 

Q. How are weak patients taken to the bathroom? 

Very weak patients are undressed in bed, a bathing 
apron or gown put on, wrapped in a blanket, and carefully 
placed with the apron into the bath. 

Q. W hat shall be given to weak patients before the bath? 
Weak patients should always take a stimulant before 
the bath. 

Q. What is to be done if the patient should faint whilst 
bathing? 

If the patient should nevertheless faint, the bath 
must at once be interrupted and the case must be reported to 
the doctor. 

Q. What is to be done after the bath? 

Immediately after the bath the patient must be well 
rubbed and brought to bed, and, if necessary, some refresh- 
ments given. 

Baths in General. 

Q. What is very important for preserving health and 
promoting recovery from disease? 
Daily bathing. 
Q. Why? 

Because all vital organs are affected through the skin. 
Q. "What benefit is derived by keeping the skin in clean, 
healthy condition? 

The circulation of the blood, the action of the kid- 
neys and bowels, and all the digestive processes are promoted, 
many diseases prevented and the assimilation of food aided. 
Q. Whom shall the Sister ask for directions in regard to 
the bathing of a patient? 



\ 



40 THE NURSING SISTER. 

The doctor; not only what kind of a bath to give, but 

also at what degree of temperature. 

Q. What is often the consequence of ignorance in this 

matter? 

Great harm to the patient. 

Q. At what temperature are baths given? 

Cold at 50 to 60 Fahrenheit. 

Temperate at 75 to 85 Fahrenheit. 

Tepid at 85 to 96 Fahrenheit. 

Warm at 96 to 98 Fahrenheit, 

Hot at 98 to 110 Fahrenheit, 

Q. How can you prepare a bran bath? 

Boil a pound of bran in a bag for a quarter of an hour, 

drai i off the fluid and add water to the fluid. 

Q. Is there any other way? 

Put enough bran in cold or warm water to make the 

water milky. 

Q. Is it advisable to give this latter bath in a stationary 

bathtub? 

Never; for, in letting off the water, the bran will be 

sucked down and will give choke to the pipes. 

Q. For what purpose is this bath chiefly given? 

For softening the skin when it is dry and flaky. 

Q. How can a salt bath be given? 

Take one pound of rock or sea salt to four gallons of 
water. 

Q. Must the salt be increased? 

Yes; in proportion to the quantity of water. 
Q. What must be done after the bath? 

The bcdy must be rubbed briskly. 
Q. In what case is this especially useful? 

To invigorate feeble constitutions. 
Q. When given daily as a cold sponge bath, what are 
the effects? 

It lessens the susceptibility to cold, rheumatism, etc. 
Q. How is a sulphur bath prepared? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 41 

By adding to each gallon of water twenty grains of 
sulphuret of potassium. 

Q. In what must this be prepared and giyen? 

In a wooden or porcelain lined vessel. 
Q. For what reason in a porcelain lined vessel? 

Because the sulphates discolor most vessels. 
Q. What is it used for? 

For skin diseases or rheumatism. 
Q. What kind of water should be used for all baths of 
skin diseases? 

Rainwater or softened water. 
Q. What should be done after the bath? 

The skin sbould not be rubbed, but patted dry with 

soft towels. 

Q. How can you prepare a soda bath? 

By adding one pound of common baking soda to the 
bath. 

Q. For what is it used? 

For the same purpose as the sulphur bath. 

Q. What should be done first with the soda? 

It should be dissolved in warm water, after which 

water of any temperature may be added in a sufficient quan 

tity for a plunge bath. 

Q: How can you prepare a starch bath? 

By mixing half a pound of starch with two quarts of 

water, to be added to the bath. 

External Cold Douche. 

Q. In what cases is a cold douche sometimes ordered? 
In cases of inflammation of the brain, and to subdue 
delirium in fever. 

Q. What must be done if the hair on the head is very 
thick? 

It should be shaved or cut off very close. 
Q, How is the patient to be prepared for this douche? 



42 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Raise the patient in the bed .and bend his head for- 
ward over an empty basin. 

Q. How can you protect his shoulders? 

By laying a piece of oil-silk or a rubber sheet between 
several folds of soft towels around his shoulders. 
Q. Where is the water then poured?» 

The cold water is poured over the crown of the head 
into an empty basin. 

Q. How is the water poured? 

The pitcher being slowly and gradually raised higher 
and higher, so that the water may fall with more force. 
Q. How is the head then dried? 

The head is dried with a towel without rubbing. 

Hot Plunge Bath. 

Q. In what cases are hot plunge baths frequently given? 

In cases of eruptive fevers. 
Q. How is the patient lifted into the bath? 

Wrap him up in a sheet or bathing apron, and put 
him, sheet and all, into the water for ten or fifteen minutes. 
Q, Against what is the patient to be protected. 

Against all exposure. 
Q. What must be warmed afterwards? 
Towels, night clothes and bedding. 
Q. What will a very hot bath do? 

It excites and stimulates the nervous system. 
Q. What may be the consequence if the water is too hot 
or the bath is continued too long? 

Languor, giddiness or faintness. 
Q. How should the temperature of the water be tested? 
With a thermometer, and the same degree of heat 
kept up throughout. 

Q. What special care must be taken? 

That no part of the body comes directly under the hot 
water tap. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 43 

Q. How should the head of the patient be kept? 

Cool. 
Q. For what purpose is a hot foot bath generally given? 

To relieve congestion and to promote perspiration. 
Q. How hot should it be given? 

Hot enough to make the skin decidedly red, and more 
hot water should be added from time to time. 
Q. How far up should the water reach? 

Up to the knees. 
Q. What must be covered? 

The patient and the tub should be covered with a 
blanket. 

Q. What can be added to the water if greater relief of 
the head is required? 

Mustard: about half a teaspoonful to a pail of water. 
Q. How long should the bath last? 

From fifteen to thirty minutes. 

Q. What should be used in bed after the bath? 

Warm stockings or a small blanket to protect the 
limbs. 

< 

Sponge Bath. 

Q. What special care must be taken when a sponge bath 
is to be given in bed? 

The chief things are that: 

1. The bed be protected with a rubber sheet and a 
draw sheet. 

2. That the patient's arms are slipped out of the 
sleeves. 

3. That a dry night shirt is always put on after the 
bath. 

Q. How much water should be taken up? 

As little as possible, but return the cloth to the water 
frequently. 

Q. How often should the water be changed? 

Two or three times during the bath. 



44 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What should stand at the side of the bed? 

A slop jar or pail for the dirty water. 
Q. What must be on hand before the bath is begun? 

Everything that is needed. 
Q. How should the patient be washed and dried? 

Only one part at a time. 
Q. How should the patient be dried? 

With soft towels, in quick, gentle strokes. 
Q. What should be done with the part as soon as it is 
washed? 

It should be enveloped in a towel. 
Q. What will this avoid? 

Exposure. 

Vapor Bath. 

Q. How can you give a vapor bath in a simple way? 

Undress the patient, put a thin flannel or woolen 
cloth about him, seat him on an arm-chair, place by his side a 
pail of boiling water, into which, as it cools, you put bricks 
made very hot, and cover the patient, chair and pail with a 
large blanket, fastened securely at the neck. For insensible 
patients, take a plain board and two chairs. 
Q. What will the steam soon produce? 

The required perspiration. 
Q. What care will be necessary? 

That the bed, bedclothes, towels and night-shirts are 
made hot before the patient uses any of them. 

Q. What other bath can be given in the same manner? 

A hot air bath with a spirit lamp. 
Q. What precautions must be taken when using a lamp? 

Against fire. 
Q. What is used frequently for a hot air bath? 

A special apparatus which is heated by a spirit lamp 
or a gas burner. 



THE NUKSING SISTER. 45 

Q. What is required if the vapor or hot air bath is to be 

given in bed? 

A cradle. 

Q. How can the hot air bath or vapor bath be given in 

bed? 

Remove the sheets and take off the patient's clothes; 

put blankets next to the patient and over the cradle so as to 
render it almost air-tight. 

Q. How can it be arranged so that the vapor can enter 
under the bedclothes? 

A gas stove or spirit lamp is placed on a chair close to 
the bed; a croup-kettle which, has a large nozzle is useful for 
this purpose; this is placed on the lamp and the nose of the 
kettle is introduced under the bedclothing. 

Q. What may be done when the perspiration is estab- 
lished freely? 

The patient may be rubbed with warmed towels, and 
warmed cloths put on. 

Q. What must be. put on the bed? 

Dry warm sheets and blankets, bat without exposing 
or disturbing the patient. 

Q. How is a sitz bath given? 

The patient is immersed, the knees to the waist, and 
covered with a blanket. 

Q. How should the temperature of the water be kept? 

It should be kept as ordered by the doctor, either hot 
or cold. 

Q. How long should this bath be prolonged? 

About twenty minutes. 
Q. What is generally the purpose of this bath? 

To excite the menstrual flow and relieve congestion. 
Q. xVt what time should the bath be given to a female 
patient? 

As nearly as can be calculated at the time when that 
would appear. 



46 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What is sometimes employed for the same purpose? 
A hot footbath. 

Footbath. 

Q. How can you give a footbath? 

Spread a rubber cloth over the sheet; have the water 
at the right temperature, tested by the elbow, to which it 
should feel hot; put the foot tub in the bed: place the patient 
on his back; draw up his knees and put the feet in water. 
Q. What must be covered? 

The knees and the tub must be covered with an extra 
blanket to keep the steam from the bed clothes. 

Cold Plunge or Pack. 

Q, What are cold baths employed for? 

Either to produce reaction, refrigeration or a nervous 
shock. 

Q. What does cold water do? 

It abstracts the heat from the body and affects the 
internal organs through the nervous system. 

Q. What is first experienced upon entering a cold bath? 

A sense of chilliness and depression. 
Q. How does it affect the pulse and temperature? 

The pulse is quickened, but the temperature of the 
surface is lowered and the blood accumulates in the internal 
organs. 

Q. What will soon follow this condition? 

A reaction, with invigorated circulation, and a feeling 
of warmth. 

Q. What will return if the bath is continued too long? 
The coldness returns, with weakness of pulse and 
general depression. 

Q. When should a cold bath not be given? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 47 

When a patient feels chilly, although his bodily tem- 
perature is high, or when there is free perspiration, when the 
patient feels faint or during menstruation. 

Q. What must be done if shivering comes on during the 
bath? 

The patient should at once be taken out of the bath 
and put to bed, heat applied and stimulants given if it per- 
sists. 

Q. For what are cold baths sometimes given? 

They are sometimes used as a tonic in cases of debility. 
Q. At what time is it best given? 

In the morning, and followed by vigorous rubbing and 
gentle exercise. 

Q. For what purpose is it mostly given? 

To bring down speedily a high temperature. 
Q. How can it be given? 

The patient is undressed, rolled in a sheet, and put in 
an empty tub or fever cot, and buckets of cold water poured 
over the body for two or three minutes until he is evidently 
cool. 

Q. What is done after the water is poured over the body 
the prescribed length of time? 

The patient is then rolled in a dry sheet and put 
back to bed, without any exertion on his part, and covered 
with blankets. 

Q. Who should be present at the first bath, if possible? 

The doctor. 
Q. What should be done if he has gone and unforeseen 
symptoms appear? 

The bath should be postponed until further in- 
struction. 

Q. What can be done if the patient is not able to stand 
the shock of cold water poured over him? 

Then the patient is laid in a tub half filled with 
water at 95 to 98 degrees, and gradually cooled down to SO or 
60 degrees, as ordered, with ice or cold water. 



48 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What should the Sister do during the bath? 

She should rub the patient in the water. 

Q. What is a fever cot? 

It is a wooden frame, covered with sacking, below 

which a rubber sheet-is hung, one end lower than the other. 

Q. How must the bed be prepared if a cold pack is to be 

applied? 

A large rubber sheet must be first spread upon the 

bed, then two or three blankets. 

Q. What is spread over the blankets? 

A sheet wrung out in cold water. 

Q. Where is the patient placed? 

The patient, who has been stripped of his clothes, is 

then laid upon this wet sheet, and it is folded over him, 

tucked in well at both sides. 

Q. What should not be included in the sheet? 

The ankles and feet. 

Q. What should be done with the blankets? 

They should be folded, one by one, over the patient? 

Q. How long should the patient be left in this pack? 

From fifteen to twenty minutes, or longer, if ordered. 

Q. What should be given to the patient while in the 

pack? 

Plenty to drink. 

Q. How must the feet be kept? 

Warm. 
Q. What effect will this generally have upon the patient? 
It will render the skin moist, subdue restlessness and 
delirium and reduce fever. 

Q. What should be done when the pack is removed? 
Dry off the patient quickly and wrap him in a dry, 
warm blanket for some hours. 

Q. How can a cold pack be given if its object is only to 
reduce fever? 

By spreading a rubber cloth over the bed, then wrap- 
ping the patient in sheets which have been wrung out in cold 
water without using the blankets. 



THE NURSIXG SISTER. 49 

Q. What is generally used then? 

Friction, by rubbing the different parts of the body 
while the patient is wrapped, and water sprinkled over him. 
Q. How can the same effect be produced easier? 

By applying towels wrung out in ice water, dry 
enough not to drip, one after another, from the neck down- 
ward. 

Q. What is to be done when the feet are reached? 

Begin again at the head and renew each in succession. 
Q. How long should this be continued? 

As long as necessary to reduce the temperature or as 
prescribed by the doctor. 

Q. What besides this is given to relieve a feverish con- 
dition? 

A co'd or tepid sponge bath. 
Q. . How can it be given? 

If possible, strip the patient, lay him between blank- 
ets and sponge freely under the covers. 

Q. What should be applied while giving a cold sponge 

bath? 

A cold compress or icebag to the head and a hot-water 

bottle to the feet. 

Q. How should the sponging always be done? 

Downward. 
Q. What should be done after the bath? 

The patient should be left undisturbed in the blanket 
for at least ten to fifteen minutes. 

Q. What is often added to the water? 

Alcohol. 
Q. For what purpose? 

This makes it more cooling by its rapid evaporation. 

, Plunge Bath. 

Q. What kind of a bathtub is most convenient if the 
patient is able to take a plunge bath? 

A portable bathtub which can be used at the bedside. 



50 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. Where and how must the bath be prepared if there 

is no portable bathtub? 

* 

Then the bath should be prepared in the bathroom, 
the temperature of the water and room must be tested with a 
thermometer, the room should be sufficiently warm to prevent 
any chill on emerging from the bath. 

Q. How is the patient taken into the bathroom? 

The night clothes are removed before the patient 
leaves the bed, and a bathing apron is put on, or the patient is 
rolled in a sheet, then wrapped in a blanket and carried or 
wheeled into the bathroom. 

Q. How is the pitient put into the bath? 

He is lifted into the bathtub, with the apron on or 
rolled in a sheet for the length of time ordered by the doctor. 
Q. What should be done on removing the patient from 
the bath? 

He should be quickly wrapped in a warm, dry sheet, 
then in a blanket, and carried back to bed. 

Q. Of what advantage is this manner for a weak pa- 
tient? 

In this way a weak patient can be made dry without 

extra fatigue; a little rubbing after he lies in bed is sufficient. 
Q. How should he be rubbed? 

With long strokes, not with little pats here and there. 
Q. What is done after he is dry. 

The damp sheet and blanket are removed and the 
night clothes put on. 

Q. What should be done if a number of baths are 
ordered in one day? 

Then it is best to roll the patient in a blanket, and 
not fatigue him with taking his night clothes off and on. 

Manner of Bathing. 

Q. What must be avoided in bathing? 

Exposing and fatigueing the patient. 
Q. What should be brought into the rooms? 



ST. JC 

SffllKSFiao. ILLINOIS. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 51 

Towels, soap, brushes, clean clothing — in a word, 
everything that is required. 

Q. What should be avoided? 

Going and coming, first fetching this, then that. It 
makes the patient nervous. 

Q. What should be spread on the bed? 

A rubber sheet and folded sheet or draw sheet. 
Q. How can the bath be given? 

Slip the arms out of the sleeves, and then pass your 
hands under the bed clothes, using freely a warm, soapy 
cloth. The cloth should not be too wet; wring it out, and 
frequently dip it into the basiD, and change the water once 
or twice. 

Q. What may be done to cool and refresh the patient? 

Sponge face and hands several times a day. 
Q. What may be put in the water to rinse out the 
mouth? 

A little cologne or alcohol, and a few drops of tr. of 
myrrh or cologne. 

Q. What may be used in place of a tooth brush? 
A soft linen cloth. 

Massage. 

Q. What is massage? 

It is a peculiar rubbing and kneading of the under- 
lying muscles. 

Q. What will answer when friction is needed to excite 
circulation of the blood? 

Brisk rubbing up and down with the bare hand or a 
hair glove all over the surface of the body. 
Q. Which is the best time for this? 

In the morning before dressing, after the patient's 
bath. 



52 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. What should be done if there is stiffness and inac- 
tion of the muscles? 

The entire body should be treated by pinching and 
rubbing the muscles and tendons. 

Q. With what should this be done? 

With the whole hand, and not with the fingers alone. 
Q. What should be done with each joint? 

It should be worked up and down and backward and 
forward. 

Q. How is this done? 

Evenly and without jerking, commencing at the toes 
and going upwards. 

Q. What is frequently used for rubbing? 

Olive oil or vaseline. 
Q. How should the rubbing be done when restless, nerv- 
ousness or fatigue is to be overcome? 

It should be done in one direction, in long, slow, firm 
strokes. 

Q. Where should you begin? 

With the shoulders and arms, then the back, abdo- 
men, thighs, legs and feet. 

Q. What effect will this have? 

It soothes and induces sleep. 
Q. How long is a patient generally rubbed? 

From one-half to one hour. 
Q. What should be avoided as much as possible? 
Exposure. 

Changing of Night Clothes. 

Q. How can the night clothes be changed? 

Have everything ready at hand, well aired and 
warmed before you begin. Then you commence, in drawing 
the clothes, by slightly raising the patient, up under his back 
to the neck, and then slip them over his head. 

Q. What makes this motion somewhat easier? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 53 

If it is possible for the patient to bend his head for- 
ward. 

Q. What is taken off last? 

The sleeves; if any part is afflicted this should be 
freed last from the clothes. 

Q. How can it best be managed if the patient wears 
flannel shirts? 

They should be open in front and slipped inside of the 
night gown, sleeves in sleeves, before beginning to make the 
change. 

Q. How are the clean clothes put on? 

The afflicted part is dressed first. If an arm or leg 
is afflicted, the sleeve should be ripped before it is put on. 
Q. What makes a good protection for a patient? 

A flannel sack put on the outside of the clean gown, 
and it should always be worn when there is much exposure. 

Combing the Hair. 
Q. How can the pillows and bed be protected during the 
time the hair is combed? 

By spreading a large towel or cloth over the shoulders. 
Q. How should the hair be combed? 

The hair should be lifted in locks, with one hand, 
and gently combed or brushed with the other. 
Q. How should the hair never be done up? 

Never in a hard knot, which presses on the patient's 
head while lying. 

Q. How can the hair be arranged best? 
In two braids. 

Bedsores. 
Q. What is generally the cause of bedsores? 

Bedsores are, in nine cases out of ten, the result of 
bad nursing. Prevention is better than cure. 



54 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. In order to prevent bedsores, what must a sister 
not do? 

She must not let false modesty prevent her from doing 
her duty in this matter. She should sponge the exposed 
parts, or those upon which pressure comes daily with alcohol 
and water, dust them with starch bor. acid and keep the 
under sheet perfectly dry and smooth, and clothing clean. 
Q. What persons are very liable to have bedsores? 

Very thin and very heavy persons, even without 
being very sick. 

Q. How can pressure be avoided? 

By changing the position of the patient every few 
hours, and by using air pillows. 

Q. What should be done as soon as red spots appear? 

The affected parts should be at once attended to care- 
fully, the alcohol bathing should be tried three or four times 
a day, followed by dusting with powder or bathed with the 
white of an egg and rainwater or brandy, and dusted with 
oxide of zinc. 

Q. What should be tried if this fails to help? 

Air or water bed, if it can be gotten. 
Q. To whom must the red spots be shown? 

To the doctor. 
Q. What is generally discontinued after the skin is 
broken and what is applied? 

The bathing of alcohol is discontinued, because its 
use is painful after the skin is broken. The sore place is fre- 
quently dressed with oxide of zinc or some other ointment 
prescribed by the doctor. 

Q. What do neglected bedsores often do? 

They separate from the sound flesh, and often expose 
the deeper tissues even to the bone. 

Q. What is often used to separate the sloughing part? 
Charcoal poultices. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 55 

Q. How long is this kept up? 

Until the gangrenous portion is removed. 
Q. How is the sore dressed and the dressing kept in 

place? 

It is dressed antiseptically. and the dressing kept in 

place with strips of adhesive plaster. 

The Giving of Medicine. 

Q. How may medicines be introduced into the system? 
Through the mouth, or skin, or mucous membrane. 
Q. How many ways are there for introducing medicine 
ihrough the skin? 

Three different ways; in the first, the medicine is 
simply placed in contact with the skin, to be absorbed; in the 
second, rubbing or heat is applied to hasten the absorption; 
in the third, the skin is removed by blistering and the medic- 
ament sprinkled over the surface. 
Q. Is the latter way used often? 

No; it is uncertain and painful. 
Q. How are medicines introduced under the skin? 

By hypodermic injections. 
Q. Who has to give these injections frequently? 

• The nursing Sister, and she must be thoroughly 
familiar with the process. 

Q. What must be observed? 

Several precautions: first, see that the syringe is in good 
working order, does not leak, and then that the needle is 
sharp and unobstructed. 

Q. How must the patient be prepared before this in- 
jection is made? 

The surface where the injection is to be made must 
be washed with soap and water, then with alcohol. 

Q. What should be done in order to make sure that the 
syringe is clean? 



56 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Fill the syringe with sterilized water, adjust the 
needle, and let the water pass through the needle; then un- 
screw the needle, fill the syriDge about one half full of alcohol 
and adjust the needle again, let the alcohol then pass through 
the needle. 

Q. How is the medicine prepared for the injection? 

If it is not already prepared in a solution, then take 
the tablet or powder, put it in a clean spoon or glass and add 
about three-fourths of a syringe full of sterilized water and 
dissolve the medicine. 

Q. What may hasten its dissolving? 

By applying heat; by holding the spoon over a light. 
Q. How is the fluid then put in the syringe? 

After the needle is screwed off from the syringe, the 
fluid is drawn up into the syringe, then the needle adjusted. 
Q. What must be done before the injection is given? 
Hold the instrument with the needle upwards and 
force out any bubbles of air that may remain in it. 
Q. How is the injection given? 

Pinch up a loose fold of flesh between the thumb and 
flnger and insert the needle quickly to the extent of an inch 
deeply down among the muscles, withdraw it slightly, then 
inject slowly the contents of the syringe. 
' Q. What must be done after the needle is removed? 

The flnger must be kept on the point of insertion for 
a moment, to prevent escape of the fluid. 
Q. What will hasten the absorption? 

Gentle rubbing. 
Q. How must the needle be cleaned? 

After using, clean the needle just as before using, by 
first pumping sterilized water, and lastly alcohol through it, 
then wipe the needle and syringe dry and replace the wire in 
the needle at once. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 57 



Q. What does the passing of alcohol through the needle 

prevent. 

Rusting of the needle. 

Q. For what purpose are hypodermic injections given? 
Either to relieve pain or induce sleep, and whenever a 
speedy action of a drug is important te-relieve stomach. 
Q. How do remedies introduced this way act? 

They act more powerfully and more rapidly than in 
any other way. 

Q. When is this injection hut slightly painful? 

If it is skillfully performed. 
Q. How can irritating fluids, such as ether, brandy, or 
camphorated oil, be injected safely? 

By using a clean aseptic needle and giving the injec- 
tion deep in the muscles. 

Q. When are such injections frequently necessary? 

In a collapse, (a sinking spell), after an operation. 
Q. What injection is said to be the least liable to form 
an abscess? 

Morphine. 
Q. To what are abscesses due in most cases? 

Either to carelessness in injecting, to the use of a 
syringe not thoroughly clean, or to an impure solution. 
Q. Are abscesses avoidable in all cases? 

No; in cases from a lowered condition of the system, 
which predisposes to inflammation upon slight irritation, they 
are unavoidable. 

Q. Which solutions are less irritating? 

A diluted solution is less irritating than a concen- 
trated one. 

Q. What will, however, remain in some cases? 

Painful spots for several days. 
Q. How can they be relieved? 

By bathing with alcohol or applying an ice bag. 



58 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. Where should the injection be given? 

Into outer side of arm Or thigh. 
Q. What places must he especially avoided? 

Bony prominences and inflamed parts, and caution 
must be observed against puncturing a vein. 

Q. What has sometimes been the result from the intro- 
duction of morphine into a vein? 
Death. 
Q. In what condition must the medicine be, that is to 
be injected? 

Perfectly dissolved and free from the slightest im- 
purity. 

Q. What is often added to the morphine which is to be 
injected? 

A little atropia, one hundred and fiftieth of a grain 
to one-fourth of a grain of morphine. 
Q. For what purpose? 

Because it prevents nausea and lessens the danger of 
poisoning. 

Q. What is sometimes given to hysterical patients? 

An injection of water. 
Q. Which is the most common way of introducing medi- 
cine into the body? 

Through the mucous membrane, generally the 
stomach. 

Q. In what form are medicines brought into the stomach? 
In various forms of pills, powders, tablets and solu- 
tions. 

Q. How is the trouble in swallowing pills ofter over- 
come? 

By enveloping them in bread or jelly. 

Q. What can be done if the patient cannot swallow them 
in this way? 

They can be pounded up and given like powder in 
water, wafers, milk or syrup. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 59 

Q. How should powders be given which are insoluble in 
water, such as bismuth or calomel 

They may be placed dry on the tongue, and a drink of 
water given to wash them down. f 

Q. How are powders given which have an objectionable 

taste? 

Either in capsules or wafers. 

Q. What is an emulsion? 

A mixture of oil and water, made by rubbing with 
gum. 

Q. What is a saturated solution? 

It is a solution that contains of any substance all that 

can be dissolved in it. 

Q. What should be done before any medicine is given? 

1. Carefully read the label before measuring the dose 
and again afterwards. 

2. In pouring keep the label on the upper side to 
avoid defacing it. 

3. Always shake the bottle before opening it; this is 
often important and always harmless. 

4. Never leave the bottle longer uncorked than neces- 
sary. 

Q. Where should medicines be kept? 

In a dry, cool and dark closet. 
Q. For what reason? 

Because dampness impairs the activity of most drugs, 
and many are decomposed by light or heat. 

Q. What is especially important in a hospital ward re- 
garding medicine? 

Never to leave dangerous drugs within reach of a 
patient. 

Q. In what does the responsibility of a nurse consist in 

giving medicine? 

In giving promptly, accurately and intelligently what 

the doctor has prescribed. 



60 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. la what cases may a Sister assume anything beyond 

this? 

Only in cases of unusual emergency, and where medi- 
cal advice is unattainable. 

Q. What besides this should a Sister try to learn about 
medicine? 

To know the effects which the medicines she gives 
are intended to produce. 

Q. Is it advisable to let the patient always know what he 
is taking? 
No. 
Q. What is a Sister never allowed to think about the 
time of giving medicine? 

That half an hour more or less will make no differ- 
ence, or that if by accident the dose should be omitted at one 
hour, the error could be rectified by doubling it the next time. 
Q. How long should the time be between medicine and 

food? 

If no special orders are given, one half hour. 

Q. How do most drugs act upon an empty stomach? 

Too powerful, and some are too irritating to be borne. 
Q. What medicines are always given after eating? 

Arsenic, iron and cod-liver oil. 
Q. How is iron taken? 

Through a glass tube or straw, in order to prevent in- 
juring the teeth. If this is not done, the teeth should be 
brushed immediately after taking it. 
Q. How can cod-liver oil be given? 

In brandy, strong hot coffee, lemon juice, or froth of 
of beer. 

Q. How should the dose be poured in the glass, spoon or 

cup? 

In the centre, so it will nowhere touch the glass, cup 

or spoon, and can be swallowed easily. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 61 

Q. How can medicine be given if ordered in minimum 
doses'? 

If it is to be given in short intervals, then ten to 
twelve drops may be dropped into a glass and the same num- 
ber of drams of water added to it. 
Q. What will this avoid? 

Giving an overdose. 
Q. In what case must the dose be prepared just when it 
is to be given? 

When the medicine is volatile or evaporating. 
Q. What is sometimes necessary if the patient is a child 
or delirious? 

To give medicine by force. 
Q. How can this be done? 

By compressing the nostrils, so that the mouth will 
have to be opened for breathing. 

Q. How is the medicine then given? 

The medicine can be carried in a spoon far back in the 
mouth and emptied slowly down the throat. 
Q. In what case should force be used? 

If all other means fail, because the excitement which 
it always occasions is injurious to the patient. 
Q. How should medicine be given? 

It should be given as near the exact time as possible, 
and the exact dose as ordered by the doctor. 

Q. Is a Sister allowed to trust her eye when giving medi- 
cine? 

Never; she must measure it always in a graduated 

glass or drop it with care. 

Q. How can medicine be given in drops? 

The prescribed number of drops may be dropped on a 
lump of sugar or in a medicine glass or spoon. Wet the cork 
with the medicine and touch it to the mouth of the bottle at 



62 THE NURSING SISTER. 



that place where the medicine is to be dropped out and by 
this prevent the medicine from flowing out too fast. 

Q. What should every medicine bottle have? 

A label with the exact direction of the doctor and the 
name of the patient. 

Q. What will a trustworthy Sister always do? 

She will always look on the label of the bottle before 
taking the cork out, whether she thinks it is right or not. 
Then she shakes the bottle. 

Q. On which side of the bottle should the medicine be 

poured out? 

On the side opposite to the label, so as not to soil the 
label. 

Q. What must be done immediately after the medicine 
is poured into the graduated glass? 

The bottle must be corked at once. 
Q. Why? 

Otherwise the medicine will lose its strength. 
Q, What should she do before she gives the medicine? 
She must first look at the label on the bottle and then 
at the patient, to be sure that it is the patient for whom the 
medicine is prepared. 

Q. If the Sister neglects to give the medicine at the ap- 
pointed time, what must she do! 

If it is three minute too'k late, she must ask the Sis- 
ter Superior for permission to give the medicine; if it is five 
minutes too late, then she must ask the Mother Superior's 
permission. 

Q. What must be done every time after the medicine is 
given? 

Every time after giving medicine, the Sister must 
wash the medicine glass or spoon in a small bowl on the medi- 
cine waiter, and wipe them carefully. 



the nursing sister. 63 

Things Important Enough to Write Down. 

Q. What things should be written down by the nursing 

Sister? 

1. The hours at which medicine is to be given, and 

each time when it is given, the hour to be crossed in the 

tablet. 

2. How much beef tea or milk the doctor has ordered 

for the patient. 

3. How often this nourishment should be given. 

4. How long intervals should be left between cer- 
tain kinds of medicine and certain kinds of food. 

Q. But what must be done if this is left to the discretion 
of the Sister? 

She must carefully arrange the time for giving food 
in such a way as not to destroy the patient's appetite by 
giving medicine immediately before the food, or nauseate 
him by giving it too soon afterwards. 

Q. What will a good nurse have for all these things? 
She will have a well arranged time-table for all these 
things, written out for the day, and will need all her ingenuity 
and care to keep the hours of medicine and food exactly apart 
from conflicting. 

Clinical Record. • 

Q. What should be noted in the clinical record? 

An exact account of what has taken place since the 
physician's last visit; how the temperature and pulse have 
varied and at what hours changes occurred; how often there 
has been a movement of the bowels, and what the character 
was; the character and quantity of urine passed; whether the 
sleep was quiet or restless; what, and at what hours, food and 
stimulants were taken; when medicines were given. In a 
word, all the symptoms the physician is interested to know, 
and that are of importance for him to know. 

Q. What will this save? 



64 THE NURSING SISTER. 

All this, put plainly and in as few words as possible, 

in writing, will save a great deal of talking in the patient's 

room, and avoid anxiety on his part about his own symptoms. 

Q. Of what benefit will it be for the doctor and also for 

the Sister? 

It will economize the doctor's time and will obviate 

mistakes if the Sister should happen to be called away or is 

taking her necessary rest when the doctor calls, and some one 

else is in temporary charge. 

Q. Why should a Sister be so careful about these little 

things? 

Because it is this systematic carefulness in these little 

things which makes the difference between a good nurse and 

a poor one. 

Precautions on Leaving the Patient to Another's 

Care. 

Q. What must a Sister do if she is obliged to leave her 
patient in some other care for a while? 

She must write down, what is to be done in her ab- 
sence, the time for giving medicine or stimulants or food, etc. 
Q. How long may she stay? 

No longer than the exact time provided for. 
Q. What arrangements must the Sister make in case she 
has to sleep whilst nursing out of the hospital? 

She must arrange to be called at a certain hour. This 
is important, for the Sister's mind must be relieved of anxiety 
about awakening. 

Protecting the Patient. 

Q. Against what must a Sister protect her patient? 

Against all, perhaps well-meaning, but injudicious in- 
terference. 

Q. How can she do this? 

By not allowing visits or conversations in his pres- 
ence, that may injure or fatigue him, such as accounts of 



THE NURSING SISTER. 65 

other people's diseases, or recommendations of sure cures and 
other quack treatments, etc. 

Q. Who should be kept out of the sick room? 

Thoughtless people and noisy children and as much as 
possible all visitors. 
Q. Why? 

Because the coming and going of visitors, chatting 
and questioning, fatigue, and are often injurious for the pa- 
tient. Besides, the more persons there are in a room, the less 
fresh air there is for the patient. 

Q. What can a Sister do in regard to keeping the patient 
quiet through the night? 

By preventing him from hearing news, especially in 
the evening, or anything that may excite him. Keep his 
mind quiet for the night, and be very careful that his first 
sleep is not disturbed. A patient who is roused out of his 
first sleep, very often has his whole night's rest destroyed. 
Q. What else is of great importance? 

That no clock strikes during the night, in the room 
or hospital. Bells should be covered, so that they cannot be 
heard through the whole house and disturb the patient every 
time it rings, for it is cruel to disturb the sleep of a poor in- 
valid, even for a minute, without absolute necessity. 

Q. What must the Sister be especially careful about in 
regard to bad news? 

If during the illness bad news of any kind has. come 
to the family, she must not allow it to be told to the patient 
without the doctor's permission. Under no circumstances 
should the patient be suddenly shocked or pained by such 
communications. 

Q. What else must the Sister do that the patient be not 
disturbed at night? 

In the hospital, as well as in private families, she 
should observe silence. Moreover, she should make all the 
arrangements for the night early, have the fire in order, the 
— 5 



66 THE NURSING SISTER. 



different articles needed at night at hand, the room aired, the 
last medicine and food promptly given, the bedside table 
ready, and the light turned down and shaded from the eyes of 
the patient. Tin shields are best for gasburners. 

Food at Night. 

Q. What patients must be fed at night? 

With very sick patients medicine and feeding go on 
regularly during the twenty-four hours, day and night. Be- 
sides these, all patients suffering from exhaustion or slowly 
recovering from a wearing illness, should take some light and 
nourishing food just before retiring. 

Q. What may be given? 

A glass of milk, not too cold, a cup of gruel, or a cup 
of well-made beef tea, will support the patient through the 
night, and prevent the feeling of exhaustion in the morning. ' 

Q. If a patient is very ill, at what time will be need the 
closest attention? 

Toward morning; for at this period of the lowest tem- 
perature the fatal chill often occurs, and the patient may be 
lost from the want of a little external warmth. 

Q. What should be done if such is the case? 

The fire should, if necessary, be replenished, the feet 
and legs should be kept warm, and whenever a tendency to 
chilling is discovered, hot bottles, hot bricks o'r warm flan- 
nels, with some warm drink, should be made use of until the 
temperature is restored. 

Q. What should be provided for towards morning, even 
in case the patient is not very ill? 

Some light nourishment. The patient has perhaps 
been restless, and wakeful, or is exhausted by heavy sleep, or 
is feeble from old age, or convalescing from severe sickness, 
with the longing for food, which is sometimes felt on recovery 
from fever. 

Q. When should this be provided for and where should 
it be kept? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 67 



It should be provided for the evening before; wait not 
until breakfast time. It should be on hand in some accessi- 
ble place, not in the patient's or any other occupied room. 
Q. What nourishment would do in this case? 

A cup of gruel, beef tea, coffee or milk, or anything 
which the patient is allowed to eat, and that can be heated 
on a spirit lamp or gas stove. 

Q. What should be done before the patient takes this? 
The patient's mouth should first be washed out with 
a soft cloth, or water given him to rinse it out. 

Q. What is often the effect of this morning nourish- 
ment? 

The patient will often have a refreshing morning nap. 
Q. Should any cooking be done in the sick room of a pri- 
vate family? 

Never, if it can possibly be helped. All warming 
should be done either in the adjoining room or in the kitchen 
but never in the presence of the patient. 

The Proper Manner of Serving Meals. 

Q. How should the meals be served to the patient? 

Serve them upon a tray or a bedtray, which is covered 
with a clean napkin. Have cups and spoons shining and 
clean. Be careful not to slop the tea into the saucer, and 
never bring too much of anything. 

Q. What should the Sister be especially carefully about? 

That all necessary things are on the tray when it is 

brought to the patient. If she is obliged to go for something 

forgotten, she should never set the waiter on the bed, but on 

the table. 

Q. May the Sister taste the food in the presence of the 
patient? 

Never. 
Q. What must be done as soon as the patient has eaten 
his meals? 

The tray should at once be taken out of the room. 



68 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. Should any food be kept in the sick room? 

No. A cup of beef tea which may be soon needed 
can be kept in the nearest cool place, carefully covered. The 
ledge outside the window in the shade, will answer, if there 
be no better place, but never on a window facing the front of 
a hospital. It should be taken away from the bed even if you 
have to give it in ten minutes again. 

Q. Where should medicine, food and stimulants never be 

kept? 

Never where the patient can see or smell them. Food 

should never be left standing on the table with the idea that 

perhaps the patient will take little by little. If the patient 

wishes anything, it should be brought promptly, hot or cold, 

the right quantity, quietly, without too much stir. 

Feeding a Patient. 

Q. How can you feed a patient? 

Prop him up gently; in cold weather put something 
around his shoulders, and a napkin under his chin and over 
the sheet. Do this whenever anything is put in his mouth. 
Q. , What should a Sister avoid and what should she no- 
tice while feeding the patient? 

She should not hurry the patient and avoid talking 
to him while he is eating. Notice the quantity taken, and 
report to the doctor in definite terms; for instance, he took 
four tablespoons full of soup or a wineglass of punch, etc. 

Q. What must a Sister consult regarding nourishment? 
The hours when the patient can best take his food; 
she must try to prevent faintness by all means. 

Q. What has been the^consequence of neglect in this 

matter? 

Not a few lives are lost by mere starvation, where a 

little ingenuity and a great deal of perseverance might have 

averted the result. 

Q. If a patient feels faint at a certain time one day, how 

can this be prevented the following day? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 69 

By giving hini the beef tea or stimulants just before 
that time the following day. 

Q. How can you persuade the patient to eat? 

Bring the food, whatever it is, to him. Do not say, 
"Don't you think you can take a little of this or that?" unless 
you have it in your hands at the time; the patient will get 
over the fancy for it while you are gone to prepare it. 
Q. What should be done regarding diet? 

It should be varied as much as possible, when allowed, 
but with a very sick patient do not use up what little appetite 
or power of digestion there may be, with foolish things, viz.: 
jelly or other sweets. 

Q. How should the meals be brought to a patient? 

Whoever brings the meals to a patient should see 
that there is a clean napkin on the waiter: that glasses, plates, 
dishes, cups, knives, spoons and forks, are perfectly clean 
and bright. 

Q. How can you feed a helpless patient? 

By giving him his food in manageable mouthfuls, and 
not hurrying. When he has finished, wipe or wash the mouth 
gently, take away the bed-rest, and let the patient down 
slowly with your hand under the pillows. 

Q. What should be done if the patient cannot take much 
food at a time? 

In such a case, give food frequently at short intervals. 
Q. Should the patient be waked for food in such a case? 
Ask the doctor about that. Sleep is sometimes more 
important than food. By no means interrupt the sleep un- 
necessarily. 

Q. What should be remembered at the same time? 

That patients sometimes sink away in their sleep, 
whilst if they had been roused and fed they might have 
lived. Six small meals are better for most sick people than 
three large ones. 

Q. How can you feed a delirious patient? 



70 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Rouse the patient's attention as much as possible, 
call him by his name, press the spoon against the lower lip, 
and move it gently back and forth. 

Q. What will generally be the consequence? 

The lips will part involuntarily, and then the spoon 
should be passed in, far back in the mouth, and emptied 
slowly. The patient must be slightly raised by a hand under 
the pillow. 

Q. What do unconscious patients often suffer from? 
From thirst, and must therefore have water given to 
them from time to time, or the tongue and mouth become 
very dry and the breathing more difficult. 

Q. Whose directions has the Sister to follow in regard 
to the nourishment and food for her patient? 

The doctor's, as to quality, quantity and time. 

Observation of Symptoms. 

Q. Is the observation of symptoms very important in 
nursing? 

Yes. If a Sister knows how to observe and report 
symptoms correctly and distinctly, it helps the doctor very 
much to form a correct judgment of the case. 

Q. What does the visit of the physician often cause? 
Always more of less excitement, and this will often 
temporarily change the entire aspect of the patient and make 
him appear better or worse than he really is. 

Q. What must the physician know in order to form a 
correct judgment about the case? 

He must know what goes on in his absence, as well as 
in his presence, especially change of symptoms, and for such 
information he is forced to rely almost wholly upon the 
Sister. 

Q. What is, therefore, of the greatest importance? 

That the Sister cultivates the habit of a critical ob- 
servation, and simple, direct, truthful statement. Even 



THE NURSING SISTER. 



where there is no intention to deceive, very few persons are 
capable of making a report of anything which shall neither 
be deficient, exaggerated or perverted. 

Q. What does the doctor want to know from a Sister? 
He wants to know facts, not opinions, and a nurse 
who can tell him exactly what has happened since his last 
visit, without obscuring it in a cloud of generalities, hasty in- 
ferences, or second hand information, will be recognized as 
an invaluable assistant. 

Q. How are symptoms classified? 

Subjective, viz.: those which are evidently only to 
the patient; and objective, viz.: those which may be observed 
also by outside observers. The former may sometimes be 
simulated, feigned for the purpose of deceit, either to excite 
sympathy, or from other motives. 

Q. "What is required to be able to distinguish between 
real and feigned symptoms? 

It requires both experience and judgment. It may 
happen that a patient will now and then deceive doctors and 
Sisters into the treatment of a malady that has no real exist- 
ence, while on the other hand genuine suffering may chance 
to be mistaken for fraud or hysteria, if the usual objective 
manifestations are absent. 

Q, What cases are always more or less suspicious? 

Those that are entirely subjective (that is, where 
symptoms are only evident to the patient), for diseases unac- 
companied by any outward sign are comparatively rare. 

Q. What must be done before an opinion is passed in re- 
gard to true or deceitful symptoms? 

The patient must be closely watched without him no- 
ticing it, for it is better to be duped once in a while than to 
fail to give aid or sympathy where it is really needed. The 
Sister should let nothing pass unseen, and note the most 
fleeting signs. By doing this she can soon judge to some ex- 



72 THE NURSING SISTER. 

tent, whether his statements are to be relied upon, and 
whether he has a tendency to exaggerate his ills, or to make 
light of them. 

Q. To whom does the decision of the existence of a dis- 
ease solely belong? 

To the doctor, but he will be largely guided by the ob- 
servations of the attentive Sister, and she herself will often be 
called upon to judge as to the urgency of special indications. 
Q. What may a Sister be called upon to judge? 

Whether the case is really extremely urgent, and 
whether she shall send for the doctor in the middle of the 
night or apply her own resources, whether she should give or 
withhold the medicine left to be used only in emergency, or 
whether she should alter or let alone any arrangement which 
has proved unexpectedly uncomfortable. 

Q. How far can the position a sufferer takes be consid- 
ered a symptom to be watched? 

The patient will instinctively take the position most 
calculated for ease. 

Q. How does the patient generally lie when one lung is 
affected? 

The patient then lies on that side where the lung is 
affected, so that the healthy one, which has to do the most 
work, may have the greatest freedom of motion. 

Q. What position will the patient take in peritonitis? 
Lying on the back, with the knees drawn up so as to 
relax the abdominal muscles. 

Q. What position does a patient take in colic? 

You may find the patient lying on the abdomen, as 
pressure relieves pain of such character. 

Q. What may be looked upon as a sign of improvement? 
If a patient who has been lying persistently on his 
back, turns over to his side. 

Q. What is a sure sign that the difficulty in breathing is 
removed? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 73 

If tbe patient, who has been forced to sit up, lies 
down and composes for sleep. 

Q. In what cases does this inability to breathe occur? 

In cases where the lungs or heart are affected. 
Q. When does restlessness occur? 

Eestlessness is ominous in most organic diseases. 
Q. What is sometimes a very bad sign? 

Slipping down in bed. 
Q. Which are the most important signs of a disease? 

Pulse, respiration and temperature are the three vital 
signs. 

Q. What should be observed about the pulse? 

The frequency and force. 
Q. What should be observed about the respirations? 

The rate, any peculiarities, whether it is abdominal or 
thoric, if regular or irregular, easy or labored, and whether or 
not accompanied by pain. 

Q. In what case is lung disease accompanied by pain, and 
when not? 

There is no pain in diseases of the lung substance 
alone; when the pleura is affected, then there is a sharp pain. 
Q. By what are most disorders of the respiratory organs 
accompanied? . 

By a cough. 
Q. What is this caused by? 

By an irritation of the air passage, and is often the 
effort of expulsion of some foreign matter. 
Q. What is the matter coughed up called? 

Sputa. 
Q. What is a cough said to be if not accompanied by ex- 
pectoration? 

A dry cough. 
Q. How is the expectoration generally in bronchitis? 
First simply mucus, later pus; in chronic cases it is 
thick and yellow. 

Q. How is it in consumption? 



74 THE NURSING SISTER. 



At first very tenacious, sometimes frothy; at an ad- 
vanced stage pus with streaks of blood, sometimes peculiar 
cheesy lumps are expectorated. 
Q. How in pneumonia? 

In pneumonia it is for the most part scanty; after a 
certain stage it has a rusty color. 

Q. What is the character in gangrene of the lungs? 

Dark greenish sputa, very free and offensive. 
Q. How in cancer of the lungs? 
A peculiar gelatinous form. 
Q. What more should be observed about the cough? 

Whether it is worst in daytime or nighttime, if it is 
first increased by moving about or on first waking, whether 
hard or loose, choking, incessant or after long intervals. 

Q. What should be done if a patient complains of cold 
without apparent reason? 

Take the temperature. 
Q. What does a sense of coldness along the spine often 

signify? 

A chill, and the temperature will be found rather 

elevated than lowered. Although the patient shivers, the 

temperature rises, because the small blood-vessels (capillaries) 

are so contracted that the blood cannot get to the surface to 

be cooled. 

Q. What always follows a genuine chill? 

High fever. 

Q. When should the temperature be taken? 

During and after the chill. 

Q. What should be carefully noted? 

The time of occurrence of the chill, duration and 

number. 

Q, What often accompanies the fall of temperature in 



fever? 



Free perspiration. 
Q. What else can produce this perspiration? 
Extreme weakness. 



THE NURSING SISTER. it> 

Q. Is the moisture or dryness of the skin important? 
Yes, it is always important. A high fever with a wet 
skin is more alarming than the same temperature with dry 
skin. 

Q. What should be noticed about the perspiration? 

In what part of the body the moisture appears, at 
what time, in connection with what symptoms, whether it is 
cold or warm, and if there is any peculiar odor about it. 

Q. What certain symptoms are often found in pulmonary 
diseases? 

A high color on one cheek alone. 
Q. What does a sudden change of color give a warning 

for? 

It gives warning for fainting (syncope). 

Q. What accompanies internal hemorrhage? 
Extreme paleness and weakness of pulse. 
Q. What indicates nausea? 

Paleness about the mouth, with compressed or slight- 
ly paled lips. 

Q. What should especially be noticed? 

Any eruption or rash; this must be promptly reported, 
its character, location, extent, time of appearance. 
Q. What should be noticed about the tongue? 

Whether it is dry or coated, or swollen. 
Q. How is the tongue likely to be in fever? 

Furred. 
Q. But is a furred tongue always a sign of disease? 

No; for some people have a furred tongue in good 
health, or it is induced by slight constipation. 

Q. What opportunity should be taken in looking at the 
tongue? 

Notice the odor of the breath and the state of the 
teeth and gums. 

Q. What must be expected, while calomel or other medi- 
cine containing mercury, is given? 

For looseness of the teeth and sore gums. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. What is this soreness called? 

Salivation. 
Q. What is a very common symptom? 

Nausea. 
Q. How is it usually relieved? 

By vomiting. 
Q. What should be noted about vomiting? 

Whether it is persistently accompanied by straining 
or pain, the intervals since taking food or medicine, the 
amount vomited and the character. 

Q. What will generally be the character? 

Undigested food; it may contain bile, blood or even 
faecal matter. 

Q. What may the vomiting of faecal matter indicate? 
This is an important symptom and may indicate in- 
testinal obstruction, and may call for immediate operation. 

Q. What effect have some drugs, as iron and bismuth, 
upon stools? 

They blacken the stools. 
Q. What color are the stools in jaundice? 

Yery light clay-colored. 
Q. What is important to note about stools? 

Frequency and quantity of the evacuation, if solid or 
fluid, the presence of mucus, pus, blood or worms. 

Q. What should be done if there is any doubt about the 
character of the stools? 

Ic should be saved for the doctor's inspection. 
Q. What is always more or less important? 

Hemorrhage from any organ. Even a slight nose- 
bleed may be an initial symptom of a typhoid. 
Q. What must be carefully observed? 

The color, quantity and general character. 
Q. What should be noted in regard to pain? 

Whether it is acute, dull, aching, stinging, burning, 
steady, spasmodic, etc 



THE NURSING SISTER. 77 

Q. What should be done if it is uncertain whether a cir- 
cumstance is of any value? 

It should he noted, for it is better to report to the 
physician a dozen superfluous items, than to omit one of im- 
portance. Memory should never be trusted, but everything 
written down. 

Laying Out a Corpse. 

Q. What is to be observed when laying out a corpse? 
The same tenderness and modesty is to be observed as 
with a living patient. 
Q. Why? 

Although the body is dead and without feeling, it is 
venerable, when looked upon in the light of faith, for it was 
once a temple of the Holy Ghost. 

Q. How should you, therefore, never handle the body? 
Never handle the body roughly; always lift it with 
two or three persons, if it is heavy; never let the head fall, and 
never step in or over the coffin. 

Q. What can be done so as not to be disturbed by the 
family? 

In order not to be disturbed, you can lock the door 
for ten or fifteen minutes. 

Q. What must a Sister provide for? 

A Sister must take care that she has sufficient confi- 
dential assistance, especially by grown persons. 
Q. How should the corpse be prepared? 

The face, the eyes, the ears, nose, mouth and teeth 
must be washed as clean as possible, and the hair combed 
neatly. 

Q. How should hands and feet be cleaned? 

The hands and arms should at least be washed thor- 
oughly up to the elbows, the finger nails trimmed. The feet 
are also thoroughly washed, the toe nails trimmed and 
cleaned. 



78 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What is to be done after the corpse is washed? 

After the body is washed, clean clothes are put on, 
whereat the utmost modesty must be preserved and is only 
done under the covers. 

Q. What is laid upon the eyes? 

Small square pieces of linen, folded several times, 
dipped in some liquid, so that the eyes remain closed. 
Q. What is tied around the mouth? 

A thin, white cloth is tied around it. 
Q. In what position are the hands placed if the deceased 
was a Catholic? 

The hands are folded as for prayer. 
Q. What should the Sisters pray who assist at laying out 
a corpse? 

The fourth penitential psalm. 
Q. How shall they pray it? 

In a low tone, so as not to disturb others. 
Q. What should never be dropped carelessly? 
Neither the coffin itself, nor the handles. 

Taking Temperature. 

Q. What is the normal temperature of the human body? 

The normal temperature is 98 4-10 degrees. 

Q. How is the temperature taken if the patient is awake 

and conscious? 

Then it is safest to put the thermometer in the 
mouth. 

Q. How is the thermometer placed in the mouth? 

It is placed in the mouth beneath the tongue, the 

lips closed for three to five minutes. 

Q. In what case should the thermometer never be placed 

in the mouth? 

It should never be placed in the mouth if the patient 

is not wide awake, or if he is irresponsible, for then there is 

danger that he may break the thermometer by biting it, and 

this would cause immediate danger of life. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 79 



Q. Where should the thermometer be placed in this case? 
In this case the thermometer should be placed under 
the clothes, in the patient's axilla, between the upper arm and 
the chest, while the arm is closely pressed to the chest. 

Q. How long should the thermometer remain in the 

axilla? 

At least five minutes. 

Q. When is the temperature generally taken? 

The temperature is generally taken in the morning 
at 8, and in the evening at 6 o'clock. 

Q. In what cases is the temperature to be taken more 
frequently? 

In cases of typhoid fever the temperature is taken 
more frequently, according to the directions of the doctor. 

Q. On what shall the clinical thermometer be kept and 
brought to the room? 

It should be kept on a small waiter or plate with 
clean sponge, small bottle or glass of a weak solution of car- 
bolic acid, and a clock or watch with a minute hand. 

Q. For what purpose is the carbolized solution used? 
For washing the thermometer before and after 
using it. 

Q. What shall be put in the bottom of the bottle? 

A little cotton to avoid breaking the thermometer in 
case it slips and strikes the bottom. 

Q. How often should this solution be changed? 
Twice a week. 

Night Watching. 

Q. What is night watching? 

Night watching is to watch by and nurse the patient 
during the hours of night. 
Q. Is it necessary? 

It is absolutely necessary if the patient is very ill; it 
belongs to the regular arrangements and duties of a hospital. 



80 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. At what time does the first night nurse come on duty? 
The first night nurse comes on duty at 8 o'clock and 
remains until half-past twelve in the morning. 
Q. The second? 

The second comes on at half-past twelve and remains 
until half-past five. 

Q. What kind of shoes should the night nurse wear and 
for what reason? 

The night nurse wears soft shoes instead of leather 
ones, so she may move about in the whole house without 
making the least noise. 

Q. If a Sister has a special night watch where should she 
remain? 

She should then constantly remain in the room or at 
the bed side of the patient. 

Q. How should a Sister manage if she has the night watch 
in the male or female department, or in the wards? 

In this case the Sister makes her rounds in the wards 
assigned to her every hour or oftener if necessary, and observes 
whether there is anything to do. 

Q. How should she move about? 

The Sister should move about quietly, without a light, 
open the door carefully, and cast a glance over the entire 
ward. 

Q. If everything is quiet and the patients asleep, what 
should the Sister do? 

The Sister should shut the door slowly, without any 
noise and withdraw. 

Q. If there are some very ill patients in a ward, what 
should a Sister do then? 

If there are some very ill patients who do not require 
a special night watch, the Sister should go up to the bed and 
observe the patient for a few minutes. 

Q. What should the Sister do if he is asleep? 

The Sister should then not disturb him. If he wishes 
anything, he'll surely ask for it. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 81 



Q. What is of special importance at night? 

It is very important at night that the doors be opened 
and shut without making a noise. 

Q. If any door should make a noise, what is to be done? 
It must be arranged in daytime, so that, the sleep of 
the patients is not disturbed during the night. 

Q. If the patient has taken anything to sleep, shall he 
be disturbed to take other medicine? 

No; this would not only be imprudent, but cruei. In 
this case, the Sister should wait until the patient wakes up. 

Q. In what case is the patient to be waked up to take 
other medicine? 

Only in special cases, when the doctor has ordered it. 
Q. What patients often have to be awakened to take 
nourishment or stimulants? 

•Fever patients or very weak patients, or convales- 
cents, if they sleep sound too long, may be awakened, to give 
them a drink or stimulants, provided the doctor has or- 
dered it. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 



FOURTH CHAPTEE. 



Some Necessary Utensils in the Sick Room. 
Atomizer. 

Q. When is a hand atomizer used? 

In cases where it is necessary to throw a spray into 
the mouth, throat, etc. The prescribed fluid is either hot or 
cold. 

Q. Is there any other atomizer? 

Yes; steam atomizers. 
Q. What care must be taken when a steam atomizer is 



used 



Not to have too much or too little water in the kettle. 
Q. For what reason? 

Because if there is too much water, the hot water 
would boil out and scald the patient's mouth, and if not 
enough the kettle would burst. 

Bedrest. 

Q. What is a very useful article for the comfort of pa- 
tients in a long sickness? 
A bedrest. 
Q. If there is no regular bedrest at hand, what can be 
used in its place? 

• Take a high, flat-backed chair, turn it up in such a 
way that the four feet are in the air, and that it rests on the 
edge of the seat and top of the back. 

Q. How should the patient be supported? 

Slip the back of the chair down in the bed, well cov- 
ered with pillows filled in to the small of the patient's back, 
and supporting his back and shoulders. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 83 



Q. In what case is a regularly made bedrest necessary? 
When the patient is permanently feeble, then a bed- 
rest which can be lowered and raised is necessary, and it 
should have arms or braces to keep the patient from slipping 
down on either side. 

Catheters. 

Q. How many different kinds of catheters are used? 

Three: glass, rubber or silver ones. 
Q. In what way are the rubber ones the best? 

They are flexible and least likely to hurt or injure the 
patient. 

Q. What size of rubber catheters are generally used for 
female patients? 

Number seven. 
Q. Which are the cleanest/ 

The glass ones. 
Q. How are the glass ones kept antiseptic? 

Immediately after they are used they should be 
washed with clear water, then laid in cold or warm water 
(not hot) and set on the stove to boil for about five minutes. 
Then they are again washed with sterilized water and kept in 
a covered glass bottle or jar, which contains an antiseptic so- 
lution, either of carbolic acid or bichloride. In this way they 
are always ready for use. 

Q. What should be kept at the bottom of the glass? 
Some cotton, so that if the catheter should happen to 
slip it would not strike the bottom of the glass and break. 
Q. How are the rubber ones cleaned? 

They must be washed thoroughly immediately after 
they are used, with green soap or sapolio and hot water. Let 
plenty of hot water run through it. Then wipe it dry and 
keep it wrapped in a piece of gauze. 

Q. When must the rubber ones be boiled? 

In certain cases when the doctor requires it, always 
before using it from one patient to another. 



Si THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. Where can they be kept if they are used at short in- 
tervals? 

In a weak solution of carbolic acid? 
Q. How are the'silver ones cleaned? 

They are cleaned and boiled in the same way as the 
glass ones, then wiped and laid aside. 

Q. What catheters should be oiled before they are used? 

The flexible rubber and the silver ones. 
Q. How can this be done? 

After they are drawn through a carbolized solution, 
then through sterilized water, they are oiled with the finger. 
Never put the instrument into the vaseline, for this might 
close up the opening in the instrument and also mix the vase- 
line with the urine and render it unfit for examination. 

Q. What must the sister do before she uses the catheter? 
After having washed her hands thoroughly she must 
lock the door, or, if in a ward, place a screen around the bed, 
remove the covers with exception of the sheets. In some cases 
it will be necessary to wash her hands in an antiseptic solu- 
tion or sterilized water. 

Q. How should the catheter be used?. 

Have the patient flat on the back, if possible with the 
thighs slightly separated. Then wash the parts carefully, 
with sponge of gauze or cotton wetted in sterilized water or 
an antiseptic solution, wash it through sterilized water, and 
insert it carefully without force. 

Q. What should be done if there seems to be an obstruc- 
tion? 

Then the Sister should stop at once, and send for the 

doctor, if the case is urgent. 

Q. How should the catheter be withdrawn? . 

After the bladder is emptied, the catheter is with- 
drawn as gently as it was introduced. While removing the 
catheter, keep a finger over the open end, so that the few 
drops which it contains will not fall on the bed. 

Q. What must be done after the catheter is withdrawn? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 85 



The parts are again washed as before. 
Q. How should this be done? 

With as little exposure as possible. 
Q. What is then to be done with the catheter? 

It must be cleaned and laid aside. 
Q. Whose duty is it to attend to the catherization? 

With male patients, a man; with female patients, the 
nurse. 

Q. May Sisters assist at the operation of the bladder of 
a male patient? 

Yes; but only then when the doctors are extremely 
careful. 

Q. Who must dress and treat the wound after the opera- 



tion? 

The surgeon himself. 

Q. How can the bladder be irrigated? 

Should it be necessary to wash out the bladder, a long 
flexible tube is passed over the catheter, which is then intro- 
duced, then the ordered fluid, either warm or cold, is poured 
into the tube at the other end with a small pitcher, or the 
rubber tube is connected with an irrigator. 

Enemeta-Syringe and Enemas. 

Q. What is an enema? 

It is a fluid preparation for injection into the rectum. 
Q. For what purpose is it most commonly given? 

To obtain an action from the bowels. 
Q. What syringe is most commonly used? 

One that has a rubber ball in the middle. 
Q. What syringe is the best and most convenient? 

A fountain syring or irrigator, which is an enameled 
tin bucket or rubber bag, to which a rubber tube of about one 
and one-half yards long is attached: at its end it has a hard 
rubber, metal or glass nozzle attached. 
Q. How can it be kept clean? 



86 ' THE NURSING SISTER. 



Before and after its use clean water should be passed 
through the syringe freely, wiped dry, and if the tube is of 
metal, it must be kept bright. 

Q. What is to be done when an enema is to be given? 
Have the ordered fluid in the basin or irrigator, the 
right temperature and quantity, before bringing it to the 
room. 

Q. How should the bed be protected? 

By placing a rubber and draw-sheet under the patient. 
Q. What position should the patient take? 

He should lie on his left side with his knees drawn up. 
Q. What must be done before the. tube is inserted? 

Some water must be passed through the rubber tube 
and nozzle from the irrigator to expel the air. 
Q. How is the nozzle inserted? 

It must be first oiled, then, if the patient is able, he 
can insert the point himself, if not, then it is the duty of the 
nurse; if possible it should be done underneath the covers. 
Q. What direction must be taken? 

Toward the small of the back, with slight inclination 
to left side, and never toward the front. 

Q. What might be the consequence if the wrong direc- 
tion would .be taken? 

The intestines might be seriously injured. 
Q. What should be done after the nozzle is inserted? 
If it is a bulb syringe the bulb should be squeezed very 
slowly. 

Q. What is to be done if the patient complains greatly 

of pain? 

Rest awhile; after delay of a few moments, you can 

usually go on without distress. 

Q. What is to be done if the irrigator is used? 

After the nozzle is inserted the irrigator must be ele- 
vated by hanging or holding it up. 

Q. What must be done if the patient is unable to bear 
any more? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 87 

It must be stopped at once. 
Q. What should be done after an enema, if the patient 
has but little control? 

The anus must be supported by folding a cloth and 
pressing it to the anus, and the patient should be kept per- 
fectly quiet for ten or fifteen minutes. 

Q. What must the Sister preserve while giving an 



enema 



She must be quiet, careful and not hurry at all. 
Q. What is frequently the reason for failure? 

Because the Sister does not take time enough, or the 
enema is not retained long enough. 

Q. How long should an enema be retained? 

If possible, ten to fifteen minutes. 
Q. W T hat is sometimes used in place of the nozzle? 

A long, soft rubber tube about fifteen inches long, 
Q. What is the enema called when this tube is used? 

A high-up enema. 
Q. How is the tube inserted? 

It is first oiled with vaseline, then carefully inserted 
eight or ten inches. 

Q. For what purpose are enemas given? 

Either to relieve or control the bowels, or for the pur- 
pose of nourishing a patient who is not able to take the food 
by the mouth. 

Q. What may be given to relieve the bowels? 

From one to two pints of liquid may be used, to which 
sometimes either soap, salt, olive oil, castor oil, glycerine or 
ox-gall are added. 

Q. What is generally used if the enema is given to con- 
trol the bowels? 

Less, fluid, probably thin boiled starch mixed with 
cold water, and some stringent or opiate. 

Q. What is taken for nourishing enema? 

Various things, such as beeftea, milk and brandy, 
strong beef soup, beef juice and brandy, eggs and milk. 



THE NURSIN<$ SISTER. 



Q. How much is generally given? 

Four to eight ounces; more than this might irritate 
and not be retained. 

Q. How long must the fluid be retained? 

As long as possible and no effort made to discharge. 

Q. What is used for a salt enema? 

One and one-half ounces of salt in one pint of warm 
water. 

Q. What is used for an oil enema? 

Either olive oil (sweet oil) or castor oil, six to eight 
ounces. 

Q. In what cases is an oil enema often used? 

After an operation of the rectum or anus, where there 
is likely to be a strain upon the sutures. 
Q. Why is this oil injected? 

In order to soften faecal mass. 
Q. By what is an oil enema followed? 

By an enema of water half an hour afterwards. 
Q. What must be done with the oil before it is injected? 
It must be warmed, for if it is cold it is too thick to 
pass through the syringe readily. 

Q. What is used for an opium and starch water enema? 

Make thin boiled starch: let it cool. Do not use more 

than one teaspoonful of raw starch - for one enema, thin the 

mixture with cold water, stirring it all the time, for if it is 

too thick it will not pass through the tube. 

Q. What is added to two ounces of this starch? 

Thirty drops of laudanum, more or less, as ordered. 
Children require less. Ask for directions from the doctor. 
Q. What is used for an oil and turpentine enema? 

One-half ounce of turpentine, one and one-half ounces 
castor oil and three-quarters of a pint of plain water or soap- 
suds. 

Q. What may be given for a nourishing enema? 

Strong beeftea or beef blood squeezed from slightly 
broiled steak, four to six ounces; cream, one ounce; brandy as 
ordered by the doctor. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 89 

Q. What may be beaten together and given by rectum? 

Egg and brandy, also milk and eggs. 
Q. How much should be given at one time? 

Not more than is likely to be absorbed, four to eight 
ounces; for a child from four to six ounces. 

Q. What is sometimes used in obstinate cases of consti- 
pation and intestinal obstruction? 

In such a case nothing proves so effective as a high-up 
enema, containing twelve to sixteen ounces of molasses. 

Q. In what case is the daily injection of a pint of cold 
water often advised? 

In cases where constipation is accompanied by bleed- 
ing haemorrhoids. 

Q. What is sometimes given to check a haemorrhage 
from the bowels? 

An injection of icewater. 
Q. What enemas are given in an irritable condition of 
the mucous membrane? 

Enemas of more soothing nature, such as thin gruel 
or flax-seed tea or barley water. These should always be 
warm. 

Q. For what are anthelmintic enemas given? 

To. destroy or remove worms. 
Q. How much liquid is used in such a case? 

A small quantity— one-half pint is sufficient for an 
adlilt; a child requires less. 

Q. By whom should the remedy to be employed be pre- 
scribed?. 

By the physician, to suit the case. 
Q. What remedies are often used? 

Salt, quassia, aloes, tincture of iron, and a weak solu- 
tion of carbolic acid are among those ussd. 

Q. What are sedatives given for by an enema? 

To relieve pain or quiet. 
Q. How much of the medicine does it generally take? 



90 THE NURSING SISTER. 



One-third more of any drug than the dose given by 

m outh to produce the same effect. Ask the doctor. 

Q. How must an injection for this purpose be given in 

order to be retained? 

It must be given slowly, and the quantity should not 

exceed three ounces and of a temperature not exceeding 100 

degrees Fahr., and the patient must be kept quiet. 

Q. What syringe can be used for these small enemas? 

A hard rubber piston syringe holding the exact quan- 
tity. 

Q, What may be attached to this if the fluid should be 
thrown up high? 

A flexible rubber tube, which may be inserted six or 
seven inch es. 

Q. Why are high up enemas often preferred? 

Because they can be given oftener and retained longer. 
Q. What special care must be taken? 

Not to let air come in at the time of pdministration of 
an enema. 

Q. For what purpose is an enema of plain or medicated 
water sometimes given? 

To wash out rectum and intestine when irritated. 
Q. What are suppositories? 

A solid body for introduction into the rectum, answer- 
ing to some extent the same purpose as an enema. 
Q. What size and form are they? 

They vary in size, and, while they are firm enough to 
retain their shape under ordinary conditions, they are suffi- 
ciently soft enough to melt under the heat of the body. 
Q. What advantage have they? . 

They can be introduced easier, and being small, are 
easily retained. 

Q. How should a suppository be introduced? 

The suppository, having first been moistened, should 
be introduced very gradually and gently into the rectum, the 
patient lying on the left side as for an enema. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 91 

Q. How high up should the suppository be introduced? 
About three inches, in order to avoid the danger of 
immediate expulsion. 

Q. What suppositories are now most frequently used? 

Glycerine suppositories and coca butter. 
Q. What must be removed before the glycerine supposi- 
tories are inserted? 

The external covering in which they are preserved, 
and it is not necessary to oil them. 

Q. In what space of time do they generally produce an 

effect? 

In flifteen to thirty minutes they produce an action 

from the towels. 

Bedpans. 

Q. What should be done in case the use of a bedpan is 
required? 

Bend the knees and introduce it from the side of the 
bed, and, if necessary, the point may be covered with a soft 
cloth to absorb moisture. 

Q. How can they be warmed? 

By dipping them into warm water for a moment, then 
drying them carefully. 

Q. How can the difficulty of using the bedpan, which is 
often felt, be overcome? 

By placing the patient, if the case allows it, as much 
in a sitting position as possible, the back and shoulders firmly 
supported, keep the knees bent, and give the feet something 
to push against. 

Bed Appurtenances. 

Q. What may be used to remove the weight of the bed- 
clothes? 

A cradle. 



92 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What can be done if there is no regular fixture at 

hand? 

Cut a barrel-hoop into two half circles, cross the two 

pieces at right angles with each other and tie them firmly to- 
gether. 

Q. How is the cradle applied? 

It is placed over the patient's body and the bedclothes 
laid over it. 

Q. For what are cushions and pads used? 

Various cushions and pads, which can be changed 
about from spot to spot as any part needs a support, are some- 
times indispensible in nursing. 

Q. Of what should they be made? 

One or more should be made of hair, because they are 
cooler and firmer than feathers. 

Q. With what must they be covered? 
With washable goods. 

Leeches. 

Q. When are leeches applied? 

Leeches are commonly applied when it is desired to 
take a small quantity of blood from any place of the body. 
Q. Where should they be applied? 

Never over a large blood vessel, but over a bony sur- 
face upon which pressure can be made in case of excessive 
hemorrhage. 

Q. What must be done before the leeches are applied? 
The part to which they are to be applied must be 
perfectly clean, first washed with soap and water, and again 
with pure water. 

Q. How should the leech itself be? 

Clean, and therefore to be washed and dried in the 
folds of a towel, before it is applied, but never handled. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 93 

Q. What will prevent the leech to bite? 

Strong odors in the room, such as sulphur, vinegar or 
tobacco. Sometimes they even refuse to bite when the pa- 
tient has taken certain drugs internally. 

Q. How can a leech be induced to take hold, if he delays? 
By making a slight scratch, or pricking your finger 
and putting a drop of blood on the place, j ust sufficient to give 
the taste of blood. 

Q. How much blood will a leech take? 

About one teaspoon-ful. 
Q. In what case should the leech be held in place with a 
test tube or leech glass? 

If applied near the eye or mouth. 
Q. What can be done if the leech is applied inside the 
nostrils or mouth? 

A thread may be put through its tail. This will not 
interfere with their working, and will keep them from being 
swallowed. 

Q. How can a leech be rendered harmless, if by accident 
it would be swallowed? 

By drinking salt water freely. 
Q. How should a leech be taken off? 

It should never be pulled off; if it does not drop off 
when it has taken sufficient blood a little salt may be 
sprinkled over it. 

Q. What may result if they are removed by force? 

The teeth of the leech will be left in the wound, 
where they may occasion an abscess or inflammatiom. 
Q. How can the flow of blood be increased? 

By applying hot fomentations or poultices, but the 
poultice must never be left on longer than a few minutes 
without examining it. There may be too free bleeding. 
Q. How can the bleeding be checked? 

By making a compress of folded squares of linen, one 
on top of the other, or roll up firmly some scraped lint and 



94 - THE NURSING SISTER. 



press it over the bites for a moment, holding it in place with 

the finger or strips of plaster, or a bandage; ice can also be 

applied. 

Q. What can be done if the blood still continues to 

flow? 

A little burnt alum can be sprinkled into the bites or 

they may be touched with caustic (nitrite of silver) or the 

doctor should be sent for. 

Q. How long must a patient be watched closely after 

leeches have been applied? 

Until all bleeding has ceased, especially at night. 

Cupping. 

Q. What are cups applied for? 

To relieve congestion, to abstract blood or prevent 
active absorption. 

Q. How many kinds or cupping are there? 

Two kinds; dry and wet cupping. 
Q. What kind is mostly practiced for the relief of pain? 

Dry cupping. 
Q. What articles are needed for cupping? 

Cupping glasses, spirit lamp, a saucer with alcohol, a 
wire with a bit of sponge or a wad of lint on the end, warm 
and cold water, carbolic acid, towels, a snapper and gauze. 
Q. Where should the burning lamp stand? 

Between the patient and the alcohol. 
Q. Where should the cups be placed? 

In a bowl containing warm carbolized water. 
Q. How are they applied? 

First wash the surface to which they should be ap- 
plied, with soap and water, dry it by rubbing it with a rough 
towel. Dip the sponge in the alcohol, light it at the lamp 
and let it burn for an instant in the glass, then withdraw it, 
at the same time placing the cup over the afflicted part. 
Q. For what reason is the flame held in the glass? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 95 

The heat will rarefy the air in it, and as it condenses 
on cooling a space will be left, to fill, in which the skin will 
be forcibly sucked up and the blood drawn toward the surface. 
Q. How long are the cups left on in dry cupping? 

From five to thirty minutes. 
Q. What is sometimes advisable? 

That instead of, as usual, allowing a cup to remain 
stationary, it be slid back and forth along the surface. 
Q. What can be avoided by this? 

The forming of circles and a large tract can be treated 
with one or two cups. 

Q. Where should a cup never be applied? 

Over a bony or irregular surface. 
Q. What must be avoided above all things? 

Burning the patient by using the alcohol too freely, so 
that it drips, or by getting the edges of the glass too hot. 
Q. How can the cup be removed? 

By making pressure with the finger close to it so that 
the air will be admitted. 

Q. What is done in wet cupping after the cup is removed: 
The snapper is applied, making a series of slight cuts. 
Q. What is applied then again? 

The cupping cup, in the same place and in the same 
way as before. 

Q. How can the hemorrhage be stopped after sufficient 
blood is extracted? 

By pads of lint. 
Q. What is needed on the wound? 

A dry dressing or some simple ointment or oil. 
Q. Where is wet cupping frequently applied? 

In the lumbar region, to relieve, inflammation of the 
kidneys. 

Poultices. 

Q. What are poultices? 

A gelatinous mass spread on a cloth. 



96 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. For what purpose are they commonly used? 

For a convenient means of applying warmth and 
moisture. 

Q. What will they often check if applied early? 

The progress of inflammation and prevent the forma- 
tion of pus, and when suppuration has set in, they facilitate 
the passage of matter to the surface and limit the spread ot 
inflammation. 

Q. For what other purpose are they applied? 

For the relief of deep-seated pain. 
Q. How large should a poultice be? 

If applied for the relief of the internal organs or to 
hasten maturation, it ought to be large enough to extend 
over a considerable surrounding surface, but over a discharg- 
ing wound it should be but little larger than the opening. 

Q. On what should a poultice be spread and how large 
should it be? 

It should be spread on a stout piece of cotton, one- 
half to one inch thick, and not to be patted down into a hard 
pudding. 

Q. What must be observed about the edges? 

They must be as thick as the middle, or else they will 
dry rapidly and are painful. 

Q. With what should the surface be covered? 

With thin gauze or muslin, so that it will not stick to 
the surface, and all can be removed at the same time. 

Q. What must be avoided when it is applied to the 

chest? 

Covering the nipples. 

Q. How large should the cloth be on which it is spread 

out? 

Large enough to double up around the four sides 

over the edges to prevent the m*ass from coming out. 
Q. How should the poultice be applied? 

Have everything ready, the patient's clothes unfas- 
tened before you bring the poultice to the bed. Apply it im- 
mediate! v as warm as it can be borne. 



THE NURSING SISTEIi. 97 

Q. With what should it be covered? 

With oil-silk, oil-muslin or rubber sheeting, and then 
flannel. 

Q. How should it be kept? 

Fastened to the place which it is intended to cover, 
and renewed before it is cold. 

Q. How often should a poultice be changed? 

This depends upon the thickness. An ordinary sized 
poultice will keep warm from two to three hours. 
Q. When is its purpose defeated? 

When it becomes a stiff, cold paste, or if it is allowed 
to slip about in an unsteady way. 

Q. What is used whenever it is necessary to spread oil 
over the surface? 
Vaseline. 
Q, What should never be used in making a poultice? 
Milk, because it becomes sour quickly and is of no 
value in itself. 

Q. What makes a good simple poultice? 

Several thicknesses of lint or soft cloth, wrung out in 
hot water and covered with a large piece of thin rubber sheet- 
ing. 

Q. What is a convenient but expensive substitute for 

this? 

Spogio-piline; this holds the heat very long. 

Q. What is generally used for making a poultice? 

Linseed meal. 

Q. How can you make a linseed poultice? 

Bring a sauce pan of water to the boiling point, and 

without removing it from the fire stir it into the linseed, 

little by little, until it has the proper consistency, just thick 

enough to cut with a knife. It must be smooth and free from 

lumps. 

Q. How large can the cloth be? 

Twice the size of the intended poultice; it is then 

spread on one half and the remainder folded back as a cover. 

—7 



98 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What is sometimes omitted entirely? 

A cover, and the poultice is applied directly over the 
skin, but portions of it are likely to adhere, so it becomes diffi- 
cult to remove it neatly. 

Q. What will help to keep the poultice soft? 

A little oil will keep it soft and make it less likely to 
stick. 

Q. What will help to retain the heat? 

A layer of cotton or wool. 
Q. In what case will this be found a valuable addition? 
When the weight of a poultice is painful and in con- 
sequence thereof must be made thin. 

Q. What is sometimes used for the poultice? 

A flannel bag, long and free to fold over. 
Q. Which is the best way to apply a large poultice for the 
relief of internal organs? 

One or two turns of a flannel bandage about the part, 
and then apply the poultice in such a bag and then confine it 
to the place with the rest of the bandage. Arranged in this 
way it will keep hot for a long time. 

Q. What should always be used to carry the poultice to 
the patient? 

A small board or tray. 
Q. What else should be kept ready? 

A basin to carry the old one away. 
Q. What must be done if a new poultice is to be applied 
over a wound? 

The old poultice being removed, the wound must be 
washed and protected by a piece of thin muslin or gauze wet 
in some disinfecting solution before the fresh one is made and 
applied. 

Q. What other kind of poultices are sometimes pre- 
scribed. 

A jacket poultice to envelope the entire chest. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 99 



Q. How is this made? 

Of two pieces of muslin or other goods, front and back, 
with strings to tie over the shoulders and under the arms. 
Q. How must the edges be? 

Sewed firmly, to keep the poultice from escaping. 
Q. In what respect do bread poultices differ from linseed 
poultices? 

They are lighter and more bland, but cool quickly and 
hold less moisture. 

Q. How are they likely to become? 

Not having the tenacious quality of linseed, they 
crumble easily and become hard and dry. 
Q. How can a bread poultice be made? 

Put a half a pint of boiling water over a sufficient 
quantity of bread crumbs, stir until a soft mass is obtained, 
spread about half an inch thick over a large cloth and apply. 
Q. What may be added if the pain to be relieved is great? 

Half an ounce of laudanum (tincture of opium). 
Q. How can a slippery-elm poultice be made? 

The same as a linseed poultice, using ground slip- 
pery-elm. 

Q. How can a charcoal poultice be made? 

Soak two ounces of bread crumbs in a half pint of 
boiling water; add slowly a wine glass of ground flaxseed, and 
when well mixed, stir in two tablespoons of powdered char- 
coal, mix it thoroughly and spread on a cloth. Over the sur- 
face of the poultice lastly sprinkle more charcoal. 
Q. Why is bread used for a charcoal poultice? 

Because it is more porous and forms a better basis. 
Q. What does this poultice require? 

Frequent renewal. 
Q. What is the poultice used for? 

For putrid sores: it absorbes the bad odor and pro- 
motes a healthy condition, but is always a dirty application. 
Q. How can a bread and suet poultice be made? 



100 THE NURSING SISTER. 

By mixing equal parts of bread crumbs and mutton 
suet in hot water over the fire until they are thoroughly 
mixed. 

Q. For what case is this poultice used? 

It is an excellent healing poultice when the surface of 
the skin is broken. 

Q. What makes a gentle stimulating poultice? 

A yeast poultice. 
Q. For what purpose is it mainly used? 

To hasten the separation of gangrenous slough. 
Q. How can a yeast poultice be made? 

Mix a pound of ground linseed or oatmeal in a half a 
pint of yeast; stir gently over the Are, when warmed, spread 
on a cloth. 

Q. In what other way can a yeast poultice be made? 

Mix six ounces of yeast with the same quantity of 
water at blood heat; stir in fourteen ounces of wheat flour and 
let it stand near the fire until it rises; apply while fermenting. 
Q. What else will answer for the same purpose? 

Dough just as mixed for bread. It is not necessary to 
wait for its rises, as the heat of the body will cause it to do so. 
Put a sufficient quantity in a muslin bag, allowing plenty of 
room for it to rise. 

Q. What makes a very mild poultice? 

A starch poultice; it retains the heat well. 
Q. What purpose is it used for? 

It is used for cancers and to allay the irritation of the 
skin diseases. 

Q. How can a starch poultice be made? 

By using starch prepared as for laundry use. 
Q. What poultices are thought to have a special pleasing 

effect? 

Scraped carrots, boiled or raw. 

Q. What poultices are sometimes used for their stimulat- 
ing purposes? 

Onions or horseradish. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 101 

Q. How can a hop poultice be made? 

Fill a thin bag with hops, steep a while in hot water, 

wring out and apply. 

Q. How can you make a bran poultice? 

The same way as a hop poultice. 

Q. How can a bran-jacket be made? 

Cut a loose fitting jacket of cotton cloth without 

seams and a second one of the same shape for a lining, sew 

them together at the edges, leaving a small opening through 

which the bran can be poured in, quilt the bran here and 

there with large stitches to keep it in place, soak in boiling 

water, press it on a tray to squeeze out the excess of water. 

Q. How can it be kept in place after putting it on? 

With a wide roller bandage it is held close to the 
body. 

Q. What advantage has this poultice? 

• It can be wet repeatedly. 

Q. In what cases is it sometimes used? 

In case of pleurisy.. 

Q. What is sometimes added to a simple poultice? 

Laudanum is sprinkled over the surface for the relief 
of pain. 

Q. How can a spice poultice be made? 

By mixing ginger, cinnamon, cloves, cayenne pepper, a 

teaspoonful of each, with half an ounce or more of cornmeal 

or flour and brandy enough to make a paste. 

Q. What other form is used? 

Sew the spices in a bag, stitch it several times to keep 

the spices in place, heat the poultice by means of dry heat and 

sprinkle a little whisky or brandy upon it and apply. 

Q. How can you make a mustard poultice? 

By adding to a simple linseed poultice a prescribed 

proportion of mustard, usually from one-eighth to one-fourth 

(measure). 

Q. What is a good substitute for a mustard poultice? 

Dipping a clean, flat sponge into a mustard paste, 

folded in a compress and applied. The poultice may be re- 



102 THE NURSING SISTER. 

newed by simply moistening the sponge with warn; water, its 
sUength being perfectly preserved. 

Q. How can a priessnitz poultice be made? 

Take a rough towel or compress, folded three or four 
times, wring it out in cold water and apply, covering in with 
oiled silk, oiled muslin or rubber tissue. 

Counter Irritants. 

Q. What is the general rule in applying counter irri- 
tants? 

In applying counter irritants do not cover a larger 

surface than is just necessary, and do not make them thick 
like a poultice. 

Q. For what purpose are counter irritants applied? 
For relieving inflammation of the deeper parts. 
Q. How many kinds of counter irritants are there? 

Three: (1) Such as produce merely local warmth 
and redness. 

(2) Blistering agents-. 

(3) Such as produce a pustular eruption. 

Q. Where are counter irritants generally applied? 

Usually over or near the seat of the disorder. 
Q. Where are they sometimes applied? 

At a remote part, for instance, a mustard poultice on 
the feet, or a mustard foot bath for the relief of the head. 

Q. What is one of the most commonly used counter irri- 
tants? 

A mustard plaster or draft. 

Q. How can this be made? 

Take one part of powdered mustard and from two to 
four times the quantity of flour, according to the desired 
strength, mix into a paste with tepid or hot water, and 
spread evenly between two pieces of muslin. 

Q. How long is the mustard plaster usually applied? 
From twenty minutes to one-half an hour. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 103 



Q. Should a mustard plaster be left on long enough to 

blister? \ 
No. 
Q. Why not? 

Because the sore that is produced by this is painful 
and slow to heal. 

Q. In what case must its action be watched carefully? 
If the patient is insensible or delirious, for if neglect- 
ed it may cause deep ulceration. 

Q. What is advisable to use for mixing, when the plaster 
is made for a child? 

One-third of glycerine instead of pure water. 
Q. For what reason? 

This will render the action less severe and it can stay 
on longer. 

Q. How can it be kept in place? 

With a bandage. 
Q. How can the burning sensation which follows a mus- 
tard plaster be relieved? 

If it is extreme, it can be relieved by dusting the parts 
with flour or fine starch, or dressing it with vaseline and cov- 
ering it with cotton to exclude the air. 

Q. How is a cayenne pepper plaster made? 

By mixing a desertspoonful of cayenne pepper in a 
thin paste of flour and water and spread like a mustard 
plaster. 

Q. In what other way is red pepper sometimes applied? 
A quantity of red pepper is stitched in a flat bag of 
flannel, wrung out in warm water, and applied over seat of 
pain. 

Q. What mustard plasters are the most neat and quickly 
ready for use? 

The mustard plasters which are bought in the drug- 
store, and are ready for use by simply dipping them in tepid 
water. 

Q. What is generally used to produce blistering? 



104 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Canthos or fly plaster. 
Q. Where should this plaster never be applied? 

Where the skin is broken, scratched or tender. 
Q. How should the plaster be applied? 

The part should be first washed, rubbed dry, and, if 
necessary, shaved. 

Q. How is the plaster kept in place? 

Either with adhesive strips or a bandage. 
Q. What care must be taken if adhesive strips are used? 
That they are not stretched tight over the canthos, 
or they will become painful as the blister raises. 

Q. How much time is required for the blister to raise? 
The time varies with different persons; for this 
reason examine it in three hours; it may take even four to 
eight hours. 

Q. What is to be done in case the blister does not rise 
within twelve hours? 

Remove the plaster and apply a poultice. 
Q. How should the plaster be removed? 
Carefully, so as not to tear the skin. 
Q. What is to be done after the plaster is removed? 

All adherent particles are cleaned off with a little oil 
or alcohol, and the blister is snipped close to the skin at sev- 
eral places with sharp-pointed scissors, and the fluid will run 
out. 

Q. What should be used for the absorption of the fluid? 

Some absorbent cotton or gauze. 
Q. With what is the raw surface dressed? 

With the ointment ordered by the doctor, vaseline, or 
oxide of zinc. 

Q. How often is this changed? 

Twice a day. 
Q. What is convenient for blistering an uneven surface? 

Cantharial collodion, as it cannot get out of place. 
Q. How is it applied? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 105 

One or two coats are applied with a camel's hair 

brush, and if covered with oil-silk or rubber tissue, it works 

more quickly. 

Q. What besides this is frequently applied with a camel's 

hair brush? 

Tincture of iodine. 

Q. What is iodine applied for? 

Either for blistering or irritating the skin. 

Q. What is often applied over the iodine if used for the 

purpose of irritating? 

Glycerine and cotton. 

Q. What is used to draw blisters quickly? 

Strong ammonia or chloroform. 

Q. How is it applied? 

A piece of lint or cotton, saturated with irritant, is 

placed upon the skin. 

Q. How can evaporation be prevented? 

By covering it tightly with a watch-glass or the cover 

of a pill-box. 

Q. How soon will the blister be raised? 

In five to ten minutes. 

Q. What will this method always cause in the patient? • 

Pain, for the ammonia, if left too long, will eat into 

the flesh. 

Q. How long should the canthos plaster be left on for a 

child? 

Not more than two or four hours? 

Q. When shall it be removed? 

As soon as the skin is well reddened; then a bread 

poultice is applied to raise the blister. 

Q. For what purpose? 

The danger with so tender a skin is that the true skin 

underneath be destroyed if the plaster remains long enough 

to puff up the surface. 

Q. How can the dressing which is to be applied after the 

olistering be kept in place? 



106 THE NURSING SISTER. 

With a bandage or strips of adhesive plaster. 
Q. In what cases should blisters be seldom used? 

In cases of aged persons or those whose circulation is 
poor, as they may cause extensive sores, which are slow in 
healing. 

Q. How is croton oil applied? 

Rub the surface to which the oil is to be applied with 
a piece of flannel; take two or three or more drops of the oil 
on a cloth and rub it into the surface, or apply with a feather. 
Q. How often is this repeated? 

At intervals of from four to six hours until small pirn- 
pies appear on the spot. 

Q. What must not be used after this? 

No oils, nor should the burning be soothed, for irrita- 
tion is wanted; a soft cloth can be tied over it to prevent the 
clothes from rubbing the surface. 

Lotions. 

Q. If a lotion is applied for the relieving of pain how 
can it be used? 

Take a piece of a sheet or several folds of old linen, 
such as old towels or table cloths, dip in the lotion and lay it 
over the affected part, covering it with oil silk or rubber cloth 
and holding it in place with a bandage. 
Q. How can the lint be re-wetted? 

By squeezing a little of the lotion over it without re- 
moving it. 

Q. What are evaporating lotions? 
Vinegar, camphor, alcohol, etc. 
Q. What are they generally mixed with and how are they 
applied? 

They are mixed with twice the quantity of ice water 
and applied on a single thickness of linen. 
Q. By what do they cool? 

By evaporation, and therefore must be re-wetted as 
the cloth dries. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 107 



Q. How should they be held in place? 

By a single bandage, and must not be covered with 
oil silk or anything else. 

Liniments and Ointments. 

Q. In what do liniments differ from lotions? 

In their mode of application, being rubbed in until 
the part is dry. 

Q. What has to be done before the liniment is applied? 
The part to which the liniment is to be applied 
should be rubbed briskly for a few moments before. 
Q. How are they applied? 

A few drops are poured into the palm of the hand, 
then rubbed on the part with firm and even pressure until all 
moisture is absorbed. 

Q-. What must always be done after a Sister has rubbed 
any part with liniments or ointment? 

As all liniments usually contain some poisonous ingre- 
dients, the hands must be washed thoroughly before touching 
any sensitive spot. 

Q. How are ointments applied? 

Ointments are spread on a compress, or they are rub- 
bed in, like liniments. 

Q. What is the rubbing in of ointments called? 
Inunction. 

Application to the Eye and Throat. 

Q. Where and with what should a lotion be applied to 
the eye? 

It should be introduced at the outer angle of the eye, 
with a glass dropper or a camel's hair brush. 
Q. How can this be done? 

Draw down the lower lid, and tell the patient to look 
up at the instant they are dropped in. 



108 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What is to be done when moist clothes are ordered? 
They should be laid over the eyes, but they must 
never be tied too fast or covered with oil silk, otherwise they 
will assume the nature of a poultice, which is always harm- 
ful to a delicate organ like the eye. 

Q. How is the interior part of the throat treated? 

By gargles or insufflation or inhalations. 
Q. What are gargles? 

Fluids brought in contact with the tonsils and forci- 
bly agitated by the air from the larynx. 

Q. How much should be used at a time? 

A tablespoonful, four or five times successively. 
Q. What must be done after an acid gargle has been 



•j 



used 

The mouth must be well rinsed. 

Q. What is used for insufflation? 

Powder, which is blown into the throat and insufflated 

by the patient. 

Q. How can this be done? 

Either with a powder blower, or the powder is placed 

in a glass tube, which is placed far back in the throat and 

blown in by the doctor or sister. 

Cold Applications. 

Q. How must cold be applied? 

Steadily, uniformly and over a definite space. 
Q. What will render the ice bag useless or even harmful? 
In case the ice bag or cold cloths slip about as the 
feverish patient turns and twists. 

Q. How often must it be renewed? 

Before it becomes warm. If this is neglected, it had 
better not been applied. 

Q. How can a cold application be made? 

With an ice bag, by putting pounded ice with a little 
water in a thin bladder or rubber bag. 

Q. How long will the water remain cold? 



THE NUliSING SISTER. 109 

Until the last piece of ice is melted; before this takes 
place it must be renewed. 

Q. What can be secured by this? 

A continuous cold, and no danger from frost bite need 
be apprehended. 

Q. Should an ice bag be rilled? 

No; it should only be filled about one-half, the air ex- 
cluded. In this way it adapts itself better to the heated part. 
Q. How should it be kept in place? 

If necessary with a bandage. 
Q. What is now extensively used as a substitute for ice 

bags? 

A coil made of rubber tubing, through which ice 

water is syphoned from a tube or bucket placed at an eleva- 
tion above the bed. 

Q. To what part of the body is this mostly applied? 

To the abdomen. 
Q. How is it applied? 

The abdomen is covered with a towel, the coil laid 
upon this, one end of the rubber tubing placed in the elevated 
bucket, the other in a bucket standing on the floor, for the 
water that has passed through the coil. 
Q. How must the coil be started? 

It must be sucked until the water commences to flow. 
Q. What must be looked for? 

That the elevated bucket is never empty, that noth- 
ing checks the flow of the water in the coil, that the bucket 
on the floor does not overflow and that the coil is kept in 
place. 

Q. How can cold cloths be applied? 

Apply a single fold of linen or cotton, dipped in cold 
water or laid upon ice, and replace it by fresh, cool ones be- 
fore it becomes warm. 

Q. What does this call for? 

Constant attention of the nurse. 
Q. What special precaution is required? 



110 THE NURSING SISTER. 

That the bed is protected. 

Q. What care must always be taken in all applications of 

water? 

That neither the patient nor the bed clothes get wet. 

Q. How can a cold or hot drip be applied*? 

The easiest way for applying either a cold or hot drip 
or continuous drop is a can, which has a narrow pipe with a 
faucet attached to it and a sprinkler at the end of this pipe. 

Q. Where is this placed? 

On one side of the bed on a table or box, and is ar- 
ranged so that the sprinkler comes just above the part 
afflicted. . The afflicted part is then laid in a Kelley-cushion 
or on a rubber sheet, and is covered with one or two layers of 
gauze, and the drip turned on and regulated by the faucet. 
The end of the Kelley-cushion or rubber sheet is placed in a 
bucket aside of the bed on the floor for the drainage of the 
waste water. 

Q. How can the drip be arranged if the above apparatus 
is not at hand? 

Put a pitcher of water on the table higher than the 
patient's bed. Put one end of a long strip of lint or lamp- 
wick in the pitcher, lay the other across the dressings which 
are applied to the inflamed part. 

Q. What care must be taken? 

That the waste water is conveyed into a basin or 
bucket, and not allowed to soak into the bed. 

Moist Hot Applications and Fomentations. 

Q. What are fomentations? 

They are poultices in modified forms, applications of 
hot water, pure or medicated, by means of pieces of flannel or 
flat sponges. 

Q. What advantage have they? 

They are clean, light and quickly prepared. 
Q. What do they require? 



THE NURSING SISTER. Ill 

Constant attention, needing to be changed every ten 
to fifteen minutes. 

Q. What are stupes? 

Pieces of flannel doubled to the desired size; these are 
to be saturated with boiling water and wrung out as dry as 
possible. 

Q. What is needed for this purpc se? 

A stupe wringer. 
Q. How can this be made? 

Take a piece of toweling with a wide hem at each 
end and a stick run through the hem at each end. - 
Q. How can this wringer be used? 

Put the stupe in the middle, saturate with boiling 
water, and twist the sticks in opposite directions until no 
more water can be squeezed out. 

Q. When is a stupe of little use? 

If it is cool enough to be wrung out with the hands. 
Q, What may be used in place of a stupe wringer? 

A towel, but there is danger of scalding the fingers. 
Q. How dry should the stupe be? 

Dry enough not to wet the bed or the clothing. 
Q. How many layers of flannel should be used? 

Two or more. 
Q. How is it applied? 

Have everything ready, shake the flannel slightly after 
taking it out of the towel. 

Q. For what reason should the flannel be shaken? 

To let the air in between the layers, and they will 
keep hot longer. 

Q. With what should the stupe be covered? 

With oil-silk or oiled muslin, an inch larger in each 
direction, and over that lay a piece of dry flannel or a layer of 
cotton. 

Q. How should the stupe be kept? 

Always warm and never allowed to get cold. 



112 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. What must be clone after the fomentations are dis- 
continued? 

The part to which they have been applied must be 
carefully dried and covered for a time with a warm dry flan- 
nel. 

Q. To what are fomentations never applied? 

To a discharging wound. 
Q, For what reason? 

Because the stupes would be spoiled at once. 
Q. What are they chiefly used for? 

For the relief of spasm of the internal organs. 
Q. What is turpentine liable to do when sprinkled on a 



tupe: 



It will easily blister. 
Q. What precaution must be taken? 

The sore spots must be covered with some dressing. 
Q. What is employed to avoid the relaxation of tissues? 

Dry Fomentations. 

Q. How can they be made? 

By heating thin bags of sand, ashes, salt, bran, hops, 
hot bricks, plates, tins, water bottles, etc. 

Q. What must be done before these fomentations are ap- 
plied? 

They must be wrapped up or covered. 

Q. For what purpose? 

Because there is danger that the patient might be 
burned. 

Q. When is this especially necessary? 

With a child or an unconscious patient. 
Q. What has often happened where this precaution was 

neglected? 

The patient, after operation, before recovering from 
the anaesthetic suffered severe burns. 

Q. Who is to be blamed for such an occurrence? 

A carelessness on the part of the nurse, which is sim- 
ply unpardonable. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 113 

Q. What applications are generally best? 

Hot applications are generally better than cold ones. 
Q. What are cold applications chiefly used for? 

To subdue inflammation. 
Q. When are cold applications never used? 

When pus is forming or during sloughing. 



-3 



114 THE NURSING SISTER. 



FIFTH CHAPTER. 



Some Special Medical Cases. 

general remarks. 

Q. What may be called the general causes of many dis- 
eases'? 

Proximity to stagnant water, exhalation from defec- 
tive drain, sewers and cess-pools, damp cellars, impurities in 
drinking water, sudden changes from heated rooms to damp 
night air, mental or bodily over-fatigue, insufficient clothing 
and food, etc. 

Q. What, therefore, should be done in cases of serious 
illness or long continued ill-feeling? 

The cause should be looked for and a remedy or pre- 
ventative applied. 

Q. What persons will be liable to take the same diseases? 

Persons living under the same conditions. 
Q. What is therefore of great importance? 

The early stages of any disease. 
Q. What should excite attention? 

A loss of appetite, a feeling of general lassitude, flush- 
ing of the face and wandering pain in the back and limbs, 
sore throat, sleeplessness, in short, anything unusual in the 
appearance or feeling, rise of temperature. 

Q. What may the neglect of these seeming trifles make? 
The difference between an unimportant indisposition 
and a serious illness. 

Q. What is, therefore, to be done upon the first appear- 
ance of such symptoms? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 115 

It is well to enforce rest, a long morning sleep, fol- 
lowed by a tepid sponge bath and some light nourishment be- 
fore dressing for the day. 

Q. What food should be taken? 

The simplest food, and not much of it. 
Q. What should be avoided and what should be secured? 
No exercise should be taken, but as much fresh air as 
possible by day and by night should be secured, and in all 
cases the patient should occupy a bed alone. 
Q. What can generally be given safely? 

Two grains of quinine in twelve hours. 
Q. With what may the bowels be moved if constipated? 
With plain enema of soapsuds. 

Typhoid Fever. 

Q. What is the principal characteristic of developed ty- 
phoid fever? 

Ulceration of the bowels. 
Q. How long may premonitory symptoms precede the 
disease? 

For days and even weeks. 
Q. Which are such symptoms? 

Restless sleep, mental disquietude, dizziness, pain in 
the different parts of the body, hot dry skin, and slight nose- 
bleed, sometimes nausea, slight diarrhoea, and a general ill- 
feeling. 

Q. How does the fever generally announce itself? 

With a long chilly sensation, lassitude and rise of 
temperature. 

Q. What must be done on the part of the nurse? 

She must follow with utmost exactness the orders of 
the doctor. 

Q. How long is the general duration of the disease? 

Three or four weeks, dating from the first rise of tem- 
Derture. 



116 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. What symptoms usually appear the first week? 

A general increase of temperature, though it may 
have a remittent type, falling in the morning but rising every 
night a little higher, till it gets up to 103 and 104 degrees. 

Q. "What other symptoms will generally appear by this 

time? 

Violent headache, intolerance of light, and perhaps 

slight delirium, parched lips and tongue, abdominal tender- 
ness and tympanites. 

Q. What are the symptoms usually in the second week? 
During the second week the temperature remains con- 
tinuously high and an eruption of rose-colored spots may ap- 
pear on the abdomen which are slightly elevated and disap- 
pear upon pressure; to return again immediately. 
Q. How long does each spot remain visible? 

Three days or longer. 
Q. How are head and bowels generally by this time? 
The headache is less, the bowels are likely to be re- 
laxed, the movements of a light ochre or pea-soup color. 
<^. What does the patient assume in severe cases? 

A characteristic typhoid appearance, the face dusky 
and indifferent, the muscular prostration evidently extreme, 
the mental condition one of a stupor, varied by active deli- 
rium. 

Q. How is the tongue? 

Brown and dry and heavily coated: sordes collect on 
the teeth. 

Q. How is the fever during the third week? 

The fever again becomes remittent, falling towards 
morning, though rising at night. 

Q. How is the general typhoid condition at this period? 
It deepens, the pulse becomes frequent and feeble, 
and rapid loss of strength. 

Q. What period is generally in typhoid the most dan- 
gerous? 

The third week. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 11 7 



Q. What should appear at the beginning of the fourth 

week? 

Evident improvement, the fever becoming intermit- 
tent, and the evening temperature decreasing, the tongue 
clearing off, the tympanites disappearing. 

Q. What is of the greatest importance in typhoid fever? 

Good nursing. 
Q. What must a Sister therefore do? 

She must keep a constant watchfulness and care from 
the beginning until complete recovery. 

Q. In what position must the patient be kept? 

In a recumbent— that is a lying-down position. 
Q. How long must this posture be maintained? 

Until the intestinal ulcers are completely healed. 
Q. What must a Sister observe in typhoid fever? 

The symptoms, viz: Whether the patient talks in his 
sleep; is clear-headed when spoken to, but listless; has great 
thirst; a bitter taste in the mouth; a sore tongue; whether 
there is any rash on the abdomen, or whether the abdomen is 
puffed up or whether patient is picking at bed clothes. 
Q. What must be very exactly observed? 

The character of the secretions, quantity, color, 
quality. 

Q, How often should the temperature be taken? 

As often as ordered by the doctor, which is usually 
every four hours, should be recorded immediately, the rapid- 
ity and evenness of the pulse and respirations at the corres 
ponding time. 

Q. What does difficulty in breathing in typhoid fever es- 
pecially in sleep, often indicate? 

An inflammation of the air passages. 
Q. W r hat does frequently occur during convalescence? 
A relapse; usually in the milder form than the origi- 
nal attack and of shorter duration. 

Q. What is the greatest danger in typhoid fever? 



]18 THE NURSING SISTER. 



A perforation of the bowels by the intestinal ulcers 
and consequently acute peritonitis. 

Q. What are the symptons of perforation? 

Marked fall of temperature, severe pain, increased by 
pressure, rapid distention of the abdomen, rapid, feeble pulse 
and other signs of collapse. 

Q. In how many hours is it usually fatal? 

In twenty-four hours. 
Q. From what may intestinal hemorrhage occur? 

It may occur without perforation from the rupture of 
an artery in some ulcer. 

Q. By what is a rupture generally preceded? 

By a sudden fall of temperature. 
Q. In what does the treatment consist after a hemor- 
rhage? 

In absolute rest and the application of an ice-bag or 

ice-coil over the abdomen. 

Q. At what temperature should the room be kept? 

At 65 degrees in winter. 
Q. How should the room be ventilated? 

With an open window and an open fire-place, if pos- 
sible. Let no draught blow upon the patient, but keep the 
air constantly changing. 

Q. For what reason is this so absolutely necessary? 

Because the atmosphere is rilled with poisonous efflu- 
via and germs from the disease. 
Q. Where do these come from? 

From the skin, the breath, and the secretions of the 
patient. 

Q. How can this poison be removed? 

By free currents of fresh air through the room, but 
never over the patient. 

Q. With what should the bed be protected? 

It should be protected with a rubber sheet and a draw 
sheet. 

Q. With what should the patient be covered? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 119 

With the top sheet and a blanket if necessary, but no 
quilts. 

Q. Should warm covers be used to keep up a free per- 
spiration? 
No. 
Q. What is desirable? 

A moist skin. 
Q. How can this be promoted? 

It is more likely to be promoted by cool bathing than 
by warm bedclothes. 

Q. On what should a fever patient never be laid? 

On a feather bed. 
Q. What pillow should be used? 

If it can be secured, a small, rather hard pillow is the 
best. 

Q. For what reason? 

Because, with a large, easily compressed feather pil- 
low the head is kept too warm, and sinking into it, the air is 
kept out from the lungs. 

Q. How should the pillows be arranged? 

In such a way that the chest is expanded, the shoul- 
ders being supported. 

Q. How often should the entire body be sponged? 

As often as ordered by the doctor, which is generally 
every two hours when having high temperature, with cold or 
warm water, as ordered, and, if ordered, adding about one 
ounce of alcohol to a basin half full of water. 
Q. What must be washed carefully? 

All the creases in the skin, particulary those parts 
which are soiled by the excretions and where pressure comes. 
Q. What will be the consequence if this is neglected for 
awhile? 

It cannot be remedied by after-care; bed sores are 
apt to form, where there is no absolute cleanliness. 

Q. What must be done on account of the frequent invol- 
untary passages from the bowels? 



120 THE NURSING SISTER. 



A careful watch must be kept both of the person aDd 
clothing, that everything may be kept clean and dry. 

Q. What precautions must be taken after the body, bed 
and clothing are cleaned? 

Precautions to keep them so. 
Q. What should be used for this reason? 

A draw sheet across the bed. They are easily removed 
and changed without exhausting the patient's strength. 
Q. What can be done besides the general sponging? 

The face and hands should be sponged repeatedly dur- 
ing the day. A small piece of ice can be put in a sponge and 
passed across the forehead now and then. 
Q. What can be laid across the temples? 

A soft, thin cloth, folded once and dipped in some 
evaporating lotion, like alcohol and water, which must be 
changed before it becomes warm. 

Q. For what purpose does this serve? 

For a double purpose; it is cleanly and has a tendency 
to lower the fever which consumes the patient's strength. 

Q. What will form across the lips and teeth in neglected 
cases of fever? 

A black crust, called sordes. 
Q. How can this be prevented? 

By washing the mouth, teeth and tongue with cool 
water, or a mouth-wash and a soft rag. 

Q. What can be used if the skin is broken? 

Add to a tumbler of water a teaspoonful of chlorate 
of potash or borax. 

Q. What will answer the purpose if the skin is not 
broken? 

Salt water or a slice of lemon rubbed across the teeth 
and about the mouth. 

Care of the Room in Typhoid Fever. 

Q. What care must be taken besides the attention giver 
to the patient and bed? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 121 

Tbat the room and the furniture are scrupulously 
clean; no soiled towels, napkins or other articles must be 
allowed hanging about. 

Q. What should be kept in the bed-pans or vessels? 

Two or three ounces of carbolized water or some other 
disinfectant. 

Q. What must be done as soon as they are removed from 
the bed'? 

A clean cloth must be thrown over them, covering the 
handle and all. 

Q. What will this prevent'? 

This prevents the air of the room from being con- 
taminated and the nurse from breathing poisonous exhala- 
tions. 

Q. By what is typhoid fever more readily conveyed? 

By these exhalations, more so than in any other way, 
also by urine. 

Q. How often should the night clothes be changed? 

Night and morning; the sheets twice or more. 
Q. What may be done for the patient's comfort? 

If his strength permits and a second bed can be had, 
he may be lifted into a fresh bed for the night, while the warm 
and damp mattress in use all day should be carried out and 
aired. 

Q. May the patient get up out of bed? 

Never allow the patient to get up, not even the first 
week. 

Q. What should be used to avoid exertion? 

Bedpan and urinal. 
Q. To what is a fever patient disposed? 

To slide down from the pillows and to lie in the same 
position all the time. 

Q. What must a Sister do to prevent this? 



122 THE NURSING SISTER. 



She must keep a close watch against this, keep him 
well on the pillows, turn him from one side to another, put- 
ting a pillow snug to his back to support him. 

Q. For what reason are these changes so necessary? 

Because long lying in one position will make the spot 
on which pressure comes tender, and bed-sores' may form. 
Q. What must be examined every day? 

The back, hips and heels, and if any redness occurs, 
bathe the place four times a day with diluted alcohol or some 
other solution, dust with powder and use air-cushions. 

Feeding the Patient in Typhoid Fever. 

Q. What will sometimes be needed in feeding the 
patient? 

All the ingenuity of the nurse to make the patient 
take the milk, beef tea, etc. 

Q. How is beef tea generally more readily taken? 

Cold, and when there is a tendency for diarrhosa it 
should never be given warm. 

Q. What is sometimes given in extreme cases? 

Beef tea of the strongest kind and milk punch alter- 
nately at intervals of an hour, half hour or less, as the doctor 
directs. 

Q. What should a Sister never do when brandy or wine 
are ordered? , 

She should never follow her own judgment as to the 
quantity, but should request the doctor to say how much of 
either he wishes to be given in twenty-four hours. 
Q. How can it be given? 

It can either be given as a cool drink with ice water, 
or in milk, in broken doses during the specified time. 

Q. In what case is a Sister justified to give the patient on 
her own responsibility- a tablespoon of brandy in hot water? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 123 

In case of faintness, or exhaustion after purging, or a 
chilly sensation that cannot be relieved by extra blankets or 
hot bottles. 

Q. How much cold water may be given with safety? 

If the physician has no objection, as much cold water 
can be given as the patient wants, but it must have been pre- 
viously boiled and cooled, two to three pints in eighteen 
hours. 

Q. What is this needed for? 

It is needed to supply the waste through perspiration 
and action of the kidneys. 

Q. What may be substituted for cold water if there is 
trouble with the bowels? 

Arrowroot, or barley, or toast water iced. 
Q. What must be given to patients who are too ill to ask 
for a drink? 

Cooling drinks must be given them frequently in a 
feeding- cup. 

Q. What should a Sister never miss regarding this? 

Never let the patient go without them. 
Q. What is refreshing to the patient? 

Small bits of ice, but they do not take the place of 
water. 

Q. What is the Sister to do if the patient is delirious? 
Never leave the patient alone: never contradict what 
he may say; accompany him to the moon if he wishes it. 
Q. How should she never speak to him? 

Never loud; he is not deaf because he is delirious. 
Q. How can he be kept in bed? 

If there is no other way, lay a long, folded draw sheet 
across the blanket and tuck it well under the mattress on 
either side. 

Q. Is a delirium always alarming? 



124 THE NURSING SISTER. 

A light delirium need not to excite alarm, unless it is 
of the low muttering kind, accompanied with pulling at the 
bed clothes or reaching up into the air after some imaginary 
object. 

Q. What is to be dreaded? 

Confusion of thoughts, loss of recollection of recent 
events, anxious look, or a wandering and vacant eye. 
Q. What are some of the dangers of the fever? 

Internal hemorrhage, diarrhoea, perforation of the 
bowels, and pneumonia. 

Q. What may sometimes occur during the second week 
or later? 

Death may occur simply from carelessness on the part 
of the nurse in permitting the patient to sit up or make some 
seeming harmless exertion, to eat harmless food in too large 
quantities. 

Q. What may not be indulged in convalescence? 

The patient's appetite. 
Q. What kind of food may be given? 

Nourishing food in small quanties, frequently, once 
in two hours, if necessary. 

Q. When may solid food be given? 

Not until distinctly permitted by the doctor. 
Q. What is one of the accompaniments of typhoid fever? 
Indigestion, dyspepsia; hence more food than can be 
assimilated at one time, is very dangerous. 

Q. What must at once be reported to the doctor? 

A moderate indigestion, a trifling diarrhoea, a slight 
nausea. 

Q. For what reason are they so dangerous? 

Because any violent straining may induce perforation 
of the bowels at points of ulceration. 

Q. What must be advanced before going outdoors is per- 
mitted? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 125 



The strength must be considerably advanced, but 
fresh air should be procured as much as possible. 

Q. What does undiluted milk do upon entering the 
stomach? 

It becomes almost solid. 
Q. Why should stools be carefully examined? 

To see whether there are any curds of milk in it. 
Q. How much milk is given for exclusive milk diet? 

One to three quarts in twenty-four hours. 
Q. How are natural milk stools? 

They are not too hard, without coagular of caseine or 
flakes of fat. 

Q. What indicates that milk is well digested? 

A clean tongue and a soft abdomen. 
Q. What does the reverse of these symptoms suggest? 
• That the milk is supplied in too large a quantity or 
that it is not being digested. 

Q. What must therefore be done? 

Three things: 1. The quantity must be reduced. 
2. The mode of administration must be changed. 3. The 
milk must be prepared or pre-digested. 

Q. How much milk is believed to be sufficient? 
Four ounces given every two or three hours. 

Diet When Patient is Permitted to Take Solid Food. 

The following list may serve as a guide when the 
patient is first permitted to take solid food: 

First Day— Chicken broth, thickened with thoroughly 
boiled rice; milk toast or cream once a day. 

Second Day— Junket, mutton broth and bread crumbs, 
with toast, a tender piece of beefsteak may be chewed but not 
swallowed. 

Third Day— A small scraped beef sandwich, tender 
sweetbread, bread and milk, a soft cooked egg or baked apple 
for supper. 



126 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Fourth Day— The soft part of two or three oysters, 
meat broth, thickened with a beatened egg, cream toast, rice 
pudding or blancmange and whipped cream. 

Fifth Day — Scraped beef sandwich, tender sweetbread, 
bread and milk, a poarched egg, gelatine. 

Sixth Day — Mush and milk, scrambled egg, chicken 
jelly, bread and butter. 

Seventh Day— Small piece of tenderloin steak or a lit- 
tle breast of boiled chicken, bread and butter, boiled rice, 
wine jelly, sponge cake and whipped cream. 

Eighth Day — A slice of rare tender roast beef, a thor- 
oughly baked mealy potatoe, served with butter or mashed 
with cream. 

Ninth Day — A little broiled fresh fish for breakfast, 
beefsteak at dinner, rice macaroni, eggs, sago, rice or milk 
pudding, a baked apple. 

Tenth Day— Mush and milk, a squab or breast of a 
partridge or roast chicken, other food as before. 

For the next four or five days the patient may select 
articles from the previous days, so that three good meals are 
taken a day, besides three or four glasses of milk taken be- 
tween meals. 

The following diet list will serve as a general guide 
for feeding convalescents from fevers of ordinary severity. 

For Convalescents. 

First Day. 

Breakfast— Poached egg on toast, cocoa. 
Lunch— Milk punch. 

Dinner— Raw oysters, cream crackers, and. if desired, 
light wine. 

Lunch— Cup of hot broth. 

Supper— Milk toast, wine jelly and tea. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 127 



Second Day. 

Breakfast— Soft cooked eggs, milk punch, coffee with 
sugar and cream. 

Lunch— Cup of soft custard. 

Dinner— Strained soup, sippets of toast, a little barley 
pudding with cream, sherry wine if desired. 

Lunch — Milk punch. 

Supper— Water toast, buttered, wine jelly, tea. 

Third Day. 

. Breakfast— Scrambled egg, cream toast, cocoa. 

Lunch— Cup of hot chicken broth. 

■ Dinner— Chicken or broiled steak, bread, light wine 

and a little tapioca pudding. 

Lunch— An eggnogg. 

Supper— Buttered dry toast, baked apple and cream, 
tea. 

Fourth Day. 

Breakfast— An orange, oatmeal with cream and sugar, 
poached egg on toast, baked potato, cocoa. 

Lunch— Cup of soft custard. 

Dinner— Soup, a small piece of beefsteak, creamed 
potatoes, baked custard, coffee. 

Lunch— One cup of chicken broth with rice. 

Supper— Raw oysters, crackers, graham bread toasted, 

wine jelly, tea. 

Fifth Day. 

Breakfast— An orange, coffee, oatmeal with cream 
and sugar, broiled mutton-chop, toast. 

Lunch— One cup of mulled wine. 

Dinner— Chicken soup, bread, creamed sweetbreads, 
baked potato, snow pudding, cocoa. 

Lunch— An eggnogg. 

Supper— Buttered dry toast, orange jelly, sponge cake 
and cream tea. 



128 the nursing sister. 

Typhus. 

Q. What is typhus fever? 

It-only resembles typhoid by name; it is a highly con- 
tagious disease, associated with overcrowding and bad ven- 
tilation. 

Q. How does the attack usually begin? 

With a chill, followed by a temperature of 105 degrees 
or more, with violent headache and extreme prostration. 
Q. When does the rash appear? 

Toward the end of the first week, showing on the sides 
of the abdomen, dirty pink or purplish spots. 
Q. How is the rash called when abundant? 

Mulberry rash. 
Q. How long does each spot persist? 

Until the disease terminates in convalescence or 
death. 

Q. What is especially affected? 

The head; violent delirium will occur. 

Q. How does the disease run? 

Usually fourteen days, after which the amendment 

will be abrupt, as the onset was. 

Q. What must be saved in every possible way? 

The patient's strength, the aim being to sustain the 

vital powers until the fever abates. 

Q. What other precautions should be kept up? 

Constant watch during the delirium; keep ice-bag on 

the head; sleeplessness must be relieved, and nourishment 

must be given, if by force. 

Q. What is especially important? 

Ventilation, because much poison is thrown off from 

lungs and skin. 



the nursing sister. 129 

Scarlet Fever or Scarletina. 

Q. How does scarlet fever usually begin? 

With headache, nausea, sore throat, pains in limbs, 
rapid pulse, and a rise of temperature of 100 to 104 or 105 
degrees. 

Q. At what time does the rash appear? 

Generally the second day, beginning at the neck and 
chest and extending over the whole body. 
Q. Where is it the deepest? 

On the neck, the back, the outer side of the limbs, 
the joints, hands and feet. 

Q. Of what color are the cheeks? 

A bright, deep red. 
Q. What must be done as soon as the case has been de- 
clared scarlet fever? 

The patient must be isolated, all precautions given 
for infectious diseases should be observed, and every order of 
the physician carried out faithfully. 

Q. At what temperature should the room be kept? 

An even temperature of 65 degrees; if possible, a light 
fire, and leave the window down an inch at the top. 

Q. How often should the windows be thrown open wide 
and the air entirely changed? 
Twice a day. 
Q. What must be done with the patient during this 
time? 

The patient must be covered head and all until the 
room is again warm. 

Q. How often should the patient be sponged or bathed? 
Two or three times a day with warm water, a>s 
directed. 

Q. What care must be taken? 
—9 



130 THE NURSING SISTER. 

That he be covered with a blanket during the bath- 
ing. 

Q. What should be done after the bath? 

The patient should be dried quickly with warm, soft 

towels, without rubbing, and as the patient lies in bed rub 

the entire surface of the body with vaseline or whatever oil 

the physician orders. 

Q. How should the bed-clothing be? 

It shculd be warm, but never heavy. Keep the feet 

and legs warm. 

Q. What food is generally given? 

Gruel, simple broth, milk, etc. 

Q. What will the doctor order when there is exhaustion 

from the fever? 

Strong and stimulating nourishment. 

Q. May the patient have cold water? 

Cold water and weak lemonade may be given freely, 

unless the doctor orders differently. 

Q. Where must the patient be kept? 

Strictly in bed; he has to use the bed-pan and urinal. 

Q. What must be guarded against especially? 

Against any check of perspiration. 

Q. What should be put on the patient if he is propped up 

in bed? 

A small jacket or shawl over the night-dress, but use 

nothing that cannot washed. 

Q. What should be noticed at night or when the patient 

is sleeping? 

The breathing, whether it is even and deep or short 

and labored, as if there was trouble with the air-passages. 

Q. What must be particularly watched? 

The condition of the excretions, especially the urine. 

Should it become scanty or smoky colored, report it at once 

to the doctor. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 131 

Q. What besides this should be observed? 

Whether there is a free, though seemingly harmless, 
discharge from the nose. This may indicate diphtheritic 
trouble. Or whether there is any swelling about the limbs. 
Q. What must be reported to the doctor? 

Every change of temperature, pulse, secretions and 
other symptons. 

Q. What is the peeling off process called? 

Desquamation. 
Q. At what time does this generally take place? 

About the fifth day after the rash appears. 
Q. May the patient get up during this process? 

Not until this process is completed. 
Q. Should the warm baths be kept up? 

If ordered by the doctor they should be kept up, but 
the least chilliness must be guarded against and the temper- 
ature of the room now allowed to be 70 degrees. 

Q. How long should the patient be kept in the room? 
Two weeks after the peeling is over. He should be 
separated not less than one month from the commencement 
of the disease. 

Q. What care must be taken when the patient goes out 
the first time? 

That be is well wrapped, with feet and hand pro- 
tected. 

Q. What maladies are likely to accompany or follow 
scarlet fever? 

Dropsy, malignant sore throat, kidney diseases, weak- 
ness of the lungs, pleurisy and many others. 

Smallpox. 

Q. What is used as a protection against smallpox? 

Vaccination. 
Q. How do the smallpox generally begin? 

With a chill, followed by a quick pulse and a high 
temperature of 104 to 106 degrees. 



132 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. Which are the distinctive symptoms? 

Severe pain in the back and pit of the stomach, which 
increase on pressure, and headache. 

Q. What do these troubles sometimes do? 

They abate for a while, but they gradually increase, 
and are at their height on the third day, or twelve days after 
exposure to the contagion. 

Q. How does the eruption begin about this time? 

It begins as small pimples, spreading 'from the face to 
the neck, breast and back, and then to the limbs and extrem- 
ities. 

Q. When does the pain pass off? 

When the eruption is developed and the patient feels 
pretty well. 

Q. When does the feeling of discomfort increase again? 
As soon as suppuration begins, and the secondary 
fever, sometimes announced by a chill, comes on. 
Q. How high does the temperature rise? 

To 105 or to 106 degrees. 
Q. What goes hand in hand in smallpox? 

The fever and eruption. 
Q. When does the patient sometimes feel relieved? 

After the pimples appear, but the patient is to be 
treated as a very sick person through the whole course of the 
disease. 

Q. How should the room be kept? 

It should be kept dark on account of the eyes, which 
suffer a great deal. 

Q. How should the room be ventilated? 

It should be fully ventilated with an open window. 
Q. How high should the temperature of the room be? 

Sixty to sixty-five degrees. 
Q. How should the bed covering be? 
Sufficiently warm, but not heavy. 
Q. What should be given for food and what for drink? 
Give broths, gruel, milk, etc., as food, and cold water 
or lemonade for drinks. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 133 

Q. What should be done if cold compresses are ordered? 
They must be rewetted by pouri ng fresh water over the 
cloths frequently. 

Q. What is prescribed to prevent scars. 

Keeping the face oiled, or better than this, have 
strips of linen spread with simple cerate and fitted carefully 
over the face, or a mask. 

Q. How should the ordered application be used? 

It must be used faithfully and the patient is to be 
prevented from scratching the surface, even in his sleep. 
Q. What is generally necessary to accomplish this? 

To tie the hands up in soft cloths, so that at least the 
nails may be kept from the face, or take mittens. 

Q. What can be done if the patient is delirious or the 
irritation becomes unbearable? . 

The only thing to do is to use a shirt with very long 
sleeves, which you tie together at the wrist. 

Dangers in the Disease. 

Q. What must be carefully watched and promptly re- 
ported? 

All symptoms, any light-headedness, sudden exhaus- 
tion, difficulty in swallowing, the manner of breathing, sound 
of the voice, etc. 

Q. What complication may occur? 

Pleurisy and laryngitis. 
Q. When may a Sister give wine-whey or brandy, with- 
out waiting for orders, in a small-pox case? 

If during the decline of the eruption, or while the 
secondary fever is in progress, a clammy sweat appears or a 
sudden sinking of tremor. 

Q. In what case should hot brandy or hot spiced drinks 
be given? 

If the pustules sink or change to a purple color. 



134 the nursing sister. 

Disinfecting and Isolating in Case of Small-pox. 

Q. What should be done if the room has a carpet? 

It should be taken up the first day that the disease is 
recognized. 

Q. Should the mattresses be changed? 

No, for they have already become infected. 
Q. What directions should be followed about isolating 
the room and quarantining? 

The door must be locked, and no communication had 
with the room, except through an adjoining one where the 
window is down from the top and a fire, if possible, lighted. 

Q. What is to be done when food, medicine, clothing, etc., 
are required? 

The request for them should be written on a slate, 
which should be hung or placed where it can be read without 
taking it down. 

Q. Where should the ordered things be brought? 

To some place agreed upon, and left for the nurse to 
carry them into the room. 

Q. What kind of bed-clothing should be used? 

The oldest kind, so that they may be destroyed after 
the patient got well or died. 

Q. What must be done with clothing that is changed? 
They must be thrown into a disinfectant, which 
should be standing in a vessel in the adjoining room. 
Q. Wherein can it be best kept? 

In a wooden tub, which can be burned afterwards. 
Q. How long should the clothing soak? 

Twelve hoi^rs. 
Q. What can be done after this? 

They can be dipped out with a stick and put into hot 
soap suds, made with carbolic soap, and after standing two 
hours may be wrung out with safety and made into bundles, 
tossed out of a window in the yard and dried in the sun. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 135 



Q. Who can iron the clothes then? 

Anybody can iron them with safety. 
Q. Who should do the first soaking and rinsing? 

The Sister, both her own and the patient's clothing 
and bedding. 

Q. Who should handle the articles used about the 

patient? 

Only those who are engaged with the case. 
Q. How should a Sister protect herself against this dis- 
ease? 

By vaccination, cleanliness of clothing, by good food, 

sufficient rest, being relieved by an assistant, if possible. 

Q. What must be done when it is necessary for her to 
leave the house? 

xV suit of fresh clothing. 
. Q. What should be done with the mattresses after the 
disease? 

They should be rolled up and burnt. 
Q. Is this disease very contagious? 

Yes; there is no disease more contagious than small- 
pox. It has been conveyed by infected articles carelessly put 
aside, opened years afterwards. 

Chickenpox. 

Q. Is chickenpox a dangerous disease? 

No; it is a harmless but very annoying trouble. 
Q. By what is it generally accompanied? 

By a little fever and general discomfort. 
Q. Where should the patient be kept? 

In the house and away from other children. 
Q. How should the air be in the room? 

Fresh, and the temperature of the room should be 
kept even at 65 to 70 degrees. 

Q. What kind of food should be given the first few days? 

Such as broth, gruels and milk. 



136 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. At what time does the eruption appear? 

On the first to the third day. 
Q. Where is it the thickest? 

On the back and chest. 
Q. How should the clothing be? 

Loose, so there be no irritation from rubbing. 
Q. How long does the trouble generally last? 

It will be over in two weeks or less. 
Q. What must be done with the room afterwards? 

It must be well cleaned and the mattresses sunned. 

Measles. 

Q. How does this disease begin? 

It begins like a severe catarrh, with a redness and 
tenderness of the eyes, the light being painful to them. 
Q. By what is it sometimes accompanied? 

By a croupy cough. 
Q. To what degree does the temperature rise? 

To 101 or to 102 degrees, and the rash appears. 
Q. When and where does the rash appear? 

On the third or fourth day, commencing about the 

mouth and eyes, quickly spreading over the whole body. 

Q, When does the disease generally pass off? 

If the necessary precautions are observed, in two 
weeks. 

Q. How should the room be kept? 

Well ventilated and at even temperature. 
Q. With what should the temperature of the room be 
tested? 

With a thermometer and not by sensation. 
Q. How often is the child bathed? 

A warm bath is given daily, but great care must be 
taken against getting chiiled. 
Q. What food is given? 

Simple foods, without solids for a while; cool water 
to drink. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 137 



Q. How must the room be kept on account of the eyes? 

It should be shaded from any bright light. 
Q. Where should the patient be kept? 

In bed as long as there are any indications of fever. 
Q. What may exposure to draught bring on? 

Pneumonia and also bronchitis. 
Q. How long should the patient be kept in the room? 

As long as there is any trace left of the measles. 
Q. What does this disease often bring on or leave be- 
hind it? 

Pneumonia, weakness of the lungs, and bronchial ca- 
tarrh. 

Q. What should be brought to the doctor's attention 
even months after the seeming recovery? 

The slightest disposition to cough or cold. 

Spasmodic Croup. 

Q. What is this disease? 

It is an affection of the muscles of the windpipe, with 
inflammation. 

Q. Who is most commonly troubled with it. 

Small children. Sometimes it may trouble them 
when they are in the twelfth year of their age. 
Q. Do relapses occur? 

Yery frequently. 
Q. How is the patient in the intervals? 
He shows little or no signs of illness. 
Q. When do the spasmodic attacks mostly occur? 

At night. 
Q. How do they occur? 

The child, being put to bed apparently well, wakes 
suddenly, with a croupy cough and violent choking spell, sits 
up in bed with an anxious face. 
Q. How is the breathing? 
Greatly oppressed. 



138 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. How long does it take before these symptoms pass off? 

About two hours after treatment has commenced. 
Q. How does treatment affect the patient? 

The patient falls into a sleep, perspiring freely, and 
wakes up with but little sign of the attack. 
Q. When will this trouble probably recur? 

At night. 
Q. How long will it be before it disappears entirely? 

From three to eight days. 
Q. Why must precautions be taken against simple spas- 
modic croup? 

Because it is sometimes followed by capillary bron- 
chitis, which in children is an extremely dangerous disease. 

Q. What must be done upon the first appearance of the 
attack? 

The doctor must be sent for. 

Q. What may be given until he comes? 

Syrup of ipecac, half a teaspoonful to a child under 
one year, and a teaspoonful to an older child, one and one- 
half to a child over two years. 

Q. How often can it be repeated? 

In all cases it can be repeated in twenty minutes, if 
no vomiting occurs. 

Q. What is the object of giving the ipecac? 

To produce vomiting, but no violent retching. 
Q. Where must a child be kept after the attack? 

In a room where the thermometer stands at an even 
temperature of 70 degrees, not lower than 65 degrees at night. 
Q. What must be avoided? 

Exposure to change of temperature in passing through 
entries or other rooms. 

Q. How must the clothing be? 

Warm. 
Q. What can be given for food? 

Milk, gruel and broth. 
Q. How long before the patient may go outdoors? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 139 

Not before all croupy sounds in breathing are over; 
that is from three to eight clays. 

Q. What weather must be avoided for croupy children? 
Damp and windy weather. 

Membraneous Croup. 

Q. Is this a dangerous disease? 

It is a very dangerous and usually fatal disease of the 
throat. 

Q. By what is it characterized? 

By an inflammation of the mucous membrane lining 
the larynx and trachea. 

Q. What is found in this mucous membrane? 

An effusion of fibrine. 
Q. What does this fibrine do? 

It coagulates on the mucous surface and forms a false 
membrane. 

Q. What mistake is sometimes made in the commence- 
ment of this disease? 

It is taken for the form of simple croup. 
Q. How does the child sometimes awake? 

It may suddenly wake with a croupy cough and 
strangling fit. 

Q. What other symptoms sometimes appear? 

All symptoms of a cold in the head for a day or two. 
and the trouble may pass for that until the doctor is called 
too late. 

Q. By what is the membraneous croup accompanied? 
It is accompanied from the first with increasing 
fever. 

Q. What symptoms follow the increased temperature in 
membraneous croup? 

Loss of appetite, thirst, quick pulse, husky voice, grad- 
ually diminishing to a whisper. 
Q. How is the breathing? 



140 THE NURSING SISTER. 

It comes as a sort of a whistle, with increasing effort 
and constant restlessness. 

Q. In what does the nursing consist? 

It consists in keeping up assiduously whatever reme- 
dies are ordered, and sustaining the strength as long as pos- 
sible. 

Q. How is the atmosphere of the room to be? 

Either moist or dry, as ordered by the doctor. 
Q. How can you secure a moist atmosphere in a room? 
It may be secured by keeping a teakettle of water boil- 
ing in the room over a spirit lamp, if there is no other way. 

Q. What should be done if there is a fire in the room or 
heat from a furnace? 

Sheets should be wrung out in water and dried in the 
room. 

Q. What is sometimes ordered to be kept in the room? 

Unpainted tubs of water, and from time to time drop 
into them lumps of quick-lime. 

Q. From what can a child easily inhale steam? 

From a steam atomizer or kettle. 
Q. How can it be introduced? 

It can be placed so that a funnel is put over the child's 
face without touching it. 

Q. Can a sleeping child take the vapor this way? 

Yes; even better than when awake. 
Q. How should the pillows be arranged? 

They must be arranged so as to lift the shoulders and 
expand the chest. 

Q. What must never press upon the child's chest? 

The chin. 
Q. What kind of food must be given? 

Food of the most nourishing kind. 
Q. What can be given for nourishment? 

Beef extract, milk punch, milk with the white of an 
egg, one egg to every half a pint of milk, shaken well. 
Q. What may be given as a drink? 

Cool wine-whey or cold water without ice. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 141 

Q. May the child be lifted up? 

Yes; it may be lifted up to ease its position. 
Q. May it be taken out of bed? 

Yes; it may be lifted upright in the arms or carried 
about in the room. 

Q. What must a nurse be careful about? 

She must be careful not to inhale the breath or to get 
particles of membrane which may be coughed up suddenly 
into the mouth, nose or eyes. 

Q. What is the last resource taken in cases of this kind? 
Tracheotomy, an operation on the windpipe, opening 
a passage to the lungs below the point at which the mem- 
brane is formed. 

Q. What is more commonly resorted to now? 

Intubation of the larynx. 
Q. What is often the result of all these operations? 

An unfavorable result; a large proportion of children 
die in spite of them. 

Q. What must a Sister get ready if the operation is to be 
performed? 

A firm table, a flat pillow or a sheet folded up small 
to put under the head, a narrow piece of tape, scissors, needle, 
strong thread or silk, towels, soft sponges, tepid water, basins 
and a fan. 

Q. What must be loosened on the patient? 

Everything about the neck. 
Q. What will the patient do if the operation is success- 
fully performed and the tube introduced? 

The patient, who for a moment before was choking to 
death, sits up, breathes freely, and all the terrible symptoms 
pass off for a while. 

Q. Is the danger then over? 

By no means. 
Q. AVhat must therefore be kept up? 

The ordered treatment, moist air, medicine and food 
given regularly. 



142 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What must above all things be taken care of? 

Te keep the tube perfectly clean and free from the 
membrane, which will be deposited in it. 
Q. How can this be done? 

The inner tube should be removed from the outer one 
every hour, or at least every two hours, and thrown into a 
basin of warm water. 

Q. What must be done to free the tube from every parti- 
cle of the membrane? 

A strip of soft linen must be pushed through it with 
a stick. 

Q, What must be done with all the membrane found in 
the basin? 

It must be saved for the doctor's inspection, then 
burned. 

Q. What must be watched closely? 

The edges of the wound and the slightest tendency to 
formation of membrane must be reported. 

Q. What must be done with the creases of the skin under 
and about the tape which holds the tube in place? 
They must be oiled to prevent chafing. 
Q. What special care* must be taken in regard to the 
mouth of the tube? 

That it is not obstructed by the clothing or bedding 
or any particle of dust or fluff, and that no drop of water is 
spattered on it. 

Q. How many days will determine the result? 

Four or five days. 
Q. Is the recovery frequent? ' 

It is an exception, even with the greatest care. 
Q. Why is recovery so seldom? 

Because the membrane forms below the wound or in 
the trachea and suffocation follows. 

Q. What must be done after recovery or death? 

All precautions must be taken for disinfecting and 
■cleaning. 



THE NURSING SISTER 143 

I 



DlPHTHERITIS. 

Q. As what is diphtheria considered? 

As a form of blood poison. 
Q. From what does it often result? 

From imperfect sewerage. 
Q. By what is it accompanied? 

By formation of membrane on the mucous surface. 
Q. How does this disease begin? 

It begins like so many others, with a feelling of gen- 
eral depression and feverishness, symptoms of cold in the 
head, hoarseness, difficulty in swallowing, stiffness of neck 
and swelling of tonsils and the glands about the throat. 

Q. What will follow these symptoms if diphtheria is 
present? 

White patches of false membrane on the tonsils and 
in the back of the throat. 

Q. What must be done upon the first suspicion of this 
disease? 

The patient must be isolated, kept in. bed and no one 
allowed in the room except the attendant. 

Q. How should the temperature and air be kept in the 

room? 

The thermometer at 65-70 degrees and the room well 

ventilated. 

Q. What may be used as a gargle? 

A saturated solution of chlorate of potash, if ordered 
by the doctor. 

Q. What may be given to the patient to drink? 

Strong beef tea, and until this is ready, give the pa- 
tient as much milk with the white of an egg as he can drink, 
one egg to one-half a pint. 

Q. What will these precautions probably save? 

They will save the patient from more severe sore 
throat, and in case of real diphtheria everything is done that 
could have been done without further instruction. 



144 THE NURSING SISTER. 

• 

Q. What must be carried out strictly? 

All orders of the doctor until the last moment, as if 
life depended upon the Sister alone. 

Q. What special precautions must be taken? 

All precautions against the spread of this contagion. 
Q. What will likely accompany this disease often? 

An abundant, clear discharge from the mouth and 
nostrils. 

Q. With what should it be wiped away? 

With soft cloths, which are immediately burnt, as the 
discharges are highly infectious. 

Q. With what should the lips and chin be washed? 

Now and then with chlorate of potash, and keep 
them covered with vaseline or a little oil. 

Q. For what reason must the lips and chin be treated in 
this manner? 

Because they are touched by the discharge. 
Q. What should be examined every day? 

The skin must be examined everywhere and if chafed 
it must be treated the same as the chin and lips. 
Q. What kind of food should be given? 

Liquid, concentrated food, as beef tea, beef juice, egg 
nogg, etc. 

Q. What are often ordered in this disease? 

Nourishing enemas. 
Q. How often should food be given? 

Every hour, or oftener if the strength is failing. Fol- 
low the doctor's directions to the letter. 

Q. What can be given frequently if stimulants are al- 
lowed? 

Wine whey, given cold is very refreshing. 

Q. What is sometimes ordered for the throat? 

An atomizer or frequent swabbing of the throat. 
Q. What are the greatest dangers in diphtheria? 

The patient may be choked by obstruction of the 
throat, or paralysis of the heart may prove a fatal termina- 
tion. • 



THE NURSING SISTER. 145 

Q. In what position should the patient be kept? 

In a horizontal position, which must be maintained 
for a long time. 

Q. What care must be taken in convalescence? 

The patient must not leave the bed or room for 
any purpose, or even sit up, until the doctor has given per- 
mission. 

Q. What may result from carelessness in this matter? 

Paralysis of the heart. 
Q. What is not uncommon in convalescence from diph- 
theria? 

Sudden death. 

Q. What is affected for a long time afterwards? 

The throat and power to swallow, in some cases by 
partial paralysis. 

Q. How must a Sister protect herself in cases of diph- 
theria? 

She must be careful not to inhale the breath, and be 

careful about particles of mucous or membrane which may be 
expelled by coughing. She must have nourishing food and 
sufficient rest. 

Q, What must be done with the sick room after the re- 
covery or death? 

The room and everything that has come in contact 
with the disease must be cleaned and disinfected. 

Whooping Cough. 

Q. How does this disease begin? 

With symptoms of an ordinary cold. 
Q. How soon is the peculiar whoop heard? 

.Not until after the tenth day. 
Q. When are the paroxysms most severe? 

At night. 
Q. What must be done with the child during the spasm? 

It should be lifted up and as much fresh air given as 
possible. 
—10 



I 



146 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. Is this disease dangerous? 

No; it is generally harmless. 
Q. What complications may arise from it? 

Bronchitis or inflammation of the lungs. 
Q. In what does the nursing consist? 

In regulating the diet, giving unstimulating food and 
avoiding constipation. 

Q. Should the child be allowed to go outdoors? 

When the weather is favorable, as much time as possi- 
ble should be spent outdoors. 

Q. How should the temperature of the room be kept? 

As even as possible. 
Q. How should the clothing be? 

Warm in cold weather, protecting arms and chest. 
Q. How long does the course of this disease run? 

From six to twelve weeks. 

Pneumonia. 
Q. What is pheumonia or lung fever? 

It is an inflammation of the lung substance. 
Q. Is it a serious disease? 

It is one of the most serious pulmonary affections. 
Q. In what different ways may it occur? 

It may occur independently, or as a complication in 
the course of some other disease. 
Q. What does it affect? 

It may affect a part or all of one or both lungs, more 
often the right lung alone. 

Q. How does the disease generally announce itsell? 

With a chill, which may last from one-half an hour to 
one hour, with deep-seated pain or shortness of breath. 
Q. What follows the chill? 

A high temperature of 103 to 105 degrees, with flushed 
face, often on one side only, headache and restlessness. 

Q. Which is the first decided symptom of pneumonia? 
Shortness of breath and pain. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 147 

Q. What must be especially noticed? 

The expectoration; a sputum cup should always be 
used and the sputa be saved for the doctor's inspection. 

Q. How is the expectoration generally in the beginning? 

Dry, scanty and clear. 
Q. When may it be expected to increase in quantity. 

After twelve to eighteen hours. 
Q. What character does it assume by this time. 

It becomes tough and tenacious. 
Q. What color does it show? 

A rusty color or streaks of blood, like prune juice. 
Q. How is the character of the cough? 

Short and hacking. 
Q. What must be observed besides this? 

The breathing during the sleep, whether the patient 
feels pain while lying in one position more than in another. 
Q. How is the breathing generally? 

Shallow and rapid. 
Q. What more should be noticed? 

The character and quantity of urine. 
Q. How is the urine generally? 

Scanty and high colored. 
Q. When does the disease reach its height? 

At the end of the first week, usually. 
Q. What will occur at the end of the first week in ordi- 
nary cases? 

The critical day, or crisis. 
Q. Are patients with pneumonia often delirious? 

Yes, especially at night. 
Q. What is always the great danger in this disease? 

Heart failure. 
Q. How must the patient be kept for this reason? 

Absolutely quiet and in bed. 
Q. How should the patient's strength be kept up. 

By not allowing unnecessary talking or exertion, and 
by giving nourishment and stimulants frequently. 



148 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What kind of food is generally given? 

Liquid but nourishing food. 
Q. How often should the patient be fed? 

At least every two hours, and a little at the time. 
Q. What applications are sometimes ordered in pneu- 
monia? 

A counter-irritant, cotton jacket, priessnits poultice, 
linseed poultice or jacket, leeches or canthos plaster. 

Q. How should the temperature of the room be kept? 
The same during day and night— 65 or 70 degrees— and 
as even as possible. 

Q. What kind of water is used for bathing? 

Tepid, unless ordered different by the doctor. 
Q. What special precautions must be taken? 

1. To guard the patient in every way against draught. 

2. Keep feet and legs warm. 

3. Never expose the patient by throwing back the 
covers, not even for a moment. 

Q. How should the patient be supported to ease his 
breathing? 

By pillows under his shoulders. 
Q. What must be put around the patient during this up- 
right position? 

A wrap around the shoulders. 

Phthisis or Pulmonary Tuberculosis. 

Q. Is this disease fatal? 

It is almost always fatal sooner or later. 
Q. By what is it characterized? 

By a morbid deposit of tubercles in the lungs. 
Q. Will these tubercles nodules only attack the lungs? 

No; they may also attack other parts of the body and 
have a great tendency to spread. 
Q. Is this disease infectious? 

Without doubt. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 14S 



Q. What will favor its development? 

Exposure, overwork, intemperance, bad ventilation. 
Q. How do the attacks come on? 

Either acute, terminating in a few weeks, or chronic, 
lasting for several years. 

Q. At what age does it most commonly attack persons? 

Persons under thirty years of age. 
Q. Which are its most characteristic symptoms? 

Cough, fever, night sweats, spitting of blood, gastric 
derangements, loss of appetite, gradually losing flesh and in- 
creasing weakness. 

Q. What does sometimes occur during tnis disease? 

Periods of apparent improvement, but they are rarely 
permanent. 

Q. From what does the patient finally die? 

From hemorrhage or exhaustion. 
Q. What may sometimes relieve the distressing symp- 
toms? 

Good treatment. 

Q. Is there no remedy or treatment to arrest for sure the 
progress of the disease? 

It has not been discovered yet. 
Q. What will sometimes exert a beneficial influence on 
the patient? 

Change of climate. 
Q. Where should the patient spend a great deal of his 
time in case the weather is pleasant? 
In the open air. 
Q. What kind of atmosphere is the most desirable for 
him? 

wind. 

Q. What must be avoided above all things? 
Over crowding and defective ventilation. 
Q. What diet should be given? 
Liberal and nourishing diet. 



A dry atmosphere, with plenty of sun and free from 



150 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What should be used for the sputa? 

Always a cup, in which a solution of bichloride should 
be kept constantly, and besides this the cups should be fre- 
quently boiled. No expectoration except in receptacle. 
Q. For what reason? 

Because the germs of the disease are largely contained 
in the expectoration, and if allowed to dry and evaporate will 
be inhaled by others. 

Q. What precautions should be taken? 

The dishes, etc., that are used by consumptives 
should be kept separate for them alone. 

Q. What care must be taken about clothes? 

That everything is thoroughly cleaned and disinfected 
before it is used by anyone else. 

Pleurisy. 

Q. What is pleurisy? 

It is an inflammation of the serous membrane cover- 
ing the lungs and lining chest cavity. 

Q. How do the surfaces of the membrane become? 

Dry and no longer slide easily over each other. 
Q. What is felt upon inspiration? 

Acute pain. 
Q. How is the cough? 

Short and repressed. 
Q. What other symptoms occur? 

Inability to draw a long breath and some elevation 
of temperature. 

Q. By what are these symptoms sometimes preceded? 

By a sense of chilliness. 
Q. By what may the pain be relieved? 

By external applications of counter-irritants. 
Q. What is sometimes applied for support? 

Strips of adhesive plaster over one side or both sides 
of the chest, and back. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 151 

Q. What may take place if the inflammation continues? 

An effusion of fluid in the pleural cavity. 
Q. If this fluid becomes abundant, upon what does it act 
embarrassing? 

Upon the action of the heart and lungs. 
Q. What is generally necessary to relieve this condition? 

Aspiration of the fluid. 
Q. What do you understand by aspirating? 

An operation which consists in drawing off the fluid 
through a hollow needle made for that purpose and attached 
to an aspirator. 

Q. What must always be done with this fluid? 

It must be saved for examination. 
Q. What will be found in some cases in the place of fluid? 

An accumulation of pus. 
Q. What is this form of pleurisy called 

Epyema. 
Q. What will be necessary in this case? 

A free opening and a thorough draining of the pleural 
cavity. 

Q. What may be necessary in some ca<=es? 

That the cavity and tube be washed with an anti- 
septic solution, and the dressings changed as needed. 

Cholera Morbus. 

Q. By what is this disease caused? 

By the use of indigestible food, stale meats or fish, im- 
pure drinking water, etc. 

Q. What symptoms occur? 

Vomiting and purging of liquid matter and bile in 
quantities. 

Q. Where has the patient violent pain? 

In the stomach, cramps in the legs and muscles of 
the abdomen, coldness and faintness. 



152 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. To what has the patient a tendency? 

To collapse. 
Q. How does the attack come on? 

Suddenly. 
Q. What should not be done at first? 

The vomiting and purging should not be checked 
Q. Why? 

Because this would prevent nature from getting rid of 
an irritant. 

Q. What should be given if the skin becomes cold and 
the pulse feeble? 

A tablespoon of brandy in a wine glass of hot water. 

Q. What may be applied to relieve pain in the stomach? 

Mustard plaster, which should be mixed with hot 
water. 

Q, What other applications may be used? 

> Wring out a flannel in hot water, sprinkle turpsntine 
over it and apply. 

Q. What is this application called? 

A turpentine stupe. 
Q. What may be the consequence if these applications 
are left on too long? 

They may blister, and must therefore be watched. 
Q. What should be done if there are cramps in the legs? 

They must be rubbed vigorously. 
Q. Where must the patient be kept? 

In bed, with hot bottles to the feet, if they are cold. 
Q. Is cholera morbus fatal? 

It is seldom fatal, but it is prostrating. 
Q. What kind of food should the patient take after the 
attack? 

Light, but nourishing food. 
Q. Of what may this consist? 

Milk and rice gruel, strong broth, beeftea and eggs, if 
allowed by the doctor. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 153 

Q. How should the return to solid food be? 

Gradually. 
Q. "What will probably be ordered if the bowels do not 
move readily? 

An enema of warm water and oil of glycerine. 

Asiatic Cholera. 

Q. By what is this disease characterized? 

By violent vomiting and purging of rice^watery evac- 
uations, cramps, extreme prostrations and collapse. 
Q. How does it usually commence? 

With slight diarrhoea and nausea. 
Q. What symptoms appear soon if it is really Asiatic 
cholera? 

Intense thirst, restlessness and muscular spasms. 
Q. How does the pulse become? 

Kapid and weak. 
Q. How is the temperature? 

It falls below normal. 
Q. The skin? 

It becomes livid. 
Q. The eye-balls? 

Sunken. 
Q. What generally precedes death. 

A ghastly appearance. 
Q. How long is the mind clear? 

Usually to the end. 
Q. What is generally given first to control the purging? 

Opium. 
Q. Where must the patient be kept? 

Insolated, in bed and warm. 
Q. In what position should the patient be kept in cholera? 

In a recumbent position, that is, flat on the back. 
Q. What may be given for the intense thirst? 

Ice at liberty, but little water. 



154 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What food? 

Strictly what has been ordered by the doctor. 
Q. What may become necessary to keep up the strength? 

Nourishing enemas. 

Q. What must be done with stools, vomited matter and 

urine? 

They must be disinfected thoroughly and disposed of 

promptly. 

Q. What precautions must be taken? 

All possible precautions against spreading the disease 
Q. By what is this disease generally communicable? 

By the excretions. 

DlARRHCEA. 

Q. What does this word signify? 

To flow through. 
Q. By what is this disease characterized? 
By profuse discharge from the bowels. 
Q. How may the trouble be brought on? 

By imprudence in eating and drinking. 
Q. What will produce the disease easily? 

Unripe fruit, badly cooked food, impurities in drink- 
ing water, over-fatigue, and sometimes grief or fright. 
Q. What will generally effect a cure or afford relief? 

Best in bed and fasting entirely for one day. 
Q. What will this rest and fasting give to the stomach 
and intestines? 

It will give the stomach time to get rid of the irri- 
tating substances, and the intestines a rest. 

Q. What may be given if the patient begins to feel 
hungry? 

Boiled rice and milk, corn-starch gruel or arrowroot, 
and return slowly to solid food. 

* Q. What should be done if the trouble continues in spite 
of this treatment? 

The physician should be consulted. 



the nursing sister. 155 

Dysentery. 

Q. What is this disease? 

An inflammation of the mucous membrane of the 

larger intestines. 

Q. What are the symptoms? 

Griping pain in the abdomen, bloody discharges from 

the bowels, constant desire to use the night-chair, and 

straining. 

Q. How should the vessels be kept? 

Disinfected. 

Q. What must be done with evacuations? 

They must at once be carried out of the room. 

Q. How should the air be kept? 

Fresh, by free ventilation. 

Q. What should be kept in the room? 

Some disinfectant, as chloride of lime mixed with 
water. 

Q. How much fluid shall be given if enemas are ordered? 

Not more than four or five ounces at a time. 
Q. What should be put around the abdomen? 

A wide flannel bandage. 
Q. How shall the patient be kept? 

Flat on his back and perfectly quiet, until all traces 
of the disease are gone. 

Q. What food is given? 

Boiled beef, and cooled, never too hot. 

Intestinal Colic. 

Q. By what is this most commonly caused? 

By constipation and flatulence. 
Q. Of what character is the pain? 

It is severe and griping. 
Q. In what way is this pain distinguished from that of 
peritonitis? 



]56 THE NURSING SISTER. 

That it is relieved by pressure, while the latter is in- 
creased by pressure. 

Q. What will generally afford entire relief. 

A clearing out of the bowels. 
Q. How can this be safely accomplished? 

By enema. 
Q. What may be helpful in relieving the pain? 

A hot drink, hot applications externally, and massage 
of the abdomen. 

Hepatic Colic. 

Q. To what is this trouble generally due? 

To the presence of a gallstone in the biliary duct. 
Q. Where does an agonizing pain come to? 

To the upper part of the right abdomen. 
Q. What does this pain produce? 

Faintness, nausea and profuse perspiration. 
Q. In what case will the attack subside? 

Only in case that the obstructing stone passes on into 
the intestine. 

Q. What may be used to relieve the pain? 

Hypodermic injections of morphia and h'ot fomenta- 
tions sprinkled with laudanum. 

Q. From what does this attack result? 

From a diseased condition of the liver. 
Q. By what are the attacks often followed? 

By jaundice. 
Q. By what is jaundice marked? 

By a yellow tinge of the skin and the whites of the 
eyes. 

K. What often accompanies jaundice? 

Great depression of spirit, loss of appetite, nausea and 
extreme itching of the skin. 

Gastritis. 

Q. What is gastritis? 

It is an inflammation of the mucous membrane of 
the stomach. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 157 

Q. Where does this cause burning pain? 

In the pit of the stomach. 
Q. What other symptoms accompany this? 

Vomiting on eating or drinking, and sometimes hic- 
cough. 

Q. How does it affect the patient? 

The patient is pale and faint, with cold extremities 
and damp skin. 

Q. How does the patient's skin become? 

Weak and feeble. 
Q. What does especially cause him pain? 

The movements of the diaphragm, and consequently 
the breathing is short. 

Q. From what does the patient suffer at times? 

From tormenting thirst, although the water drank is 
vomited at once. 

Q. By what may the disease be brought on? 

By taking any substance into the stomach which in 
itself is poisonous, or becomes so, or irritating. 
Q. How should the patient be kept? 

At rest, absolutely in bed. 
Q. What may be given as a drink? 

Cold water, if it can be retained. 
Q, What must be done if enemas are ordered? 

They must be given gently and disturb the patient's 
position as little as possible. 

Q. What are the general rules for administering food? 

To give the food in small quantities frequently. 
Q. To what should the diet be confined? 

To milk diluted with lime water, two tablespoonsful 
to a half pint of milk. 

Q. How should this be commenced? 

Give a teaspoonful once in half an hour. 
Q. When may this be increased to a dessertspoonful? 

If the milk is retained for two or three hours. 



158 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What should be gradually increased? 

The dose; lengthen the intervals until two table- 
spoonsful can be taken every two hours. 

Q. In what case must the dose be omitted? 

On the slightest feeling of nausea or belching of wind. 
Q. What is always more advisable in regard to food? 
To shorten the intervals between the doses than to 
increase the dose suddenly. 

Q. To what food may you gradually go from milk? 

To thin gruel made very smooth, of rice flour, arrow- 
root or corn starch. 

Indigestion or Dyspepsia. 

Q. What is indigestion or dyspepsia? 

It may be merely a slight functional disorder or a 
symptom of a serious disease. 

Q. By what symptoms may it be accompanied? 

By pain, nausea, regurgitation, flatulence, palpitation, 
headache, constipation or diarrhoea. 
Q, What are dyspectics noted for? 

For constantly studying their symptoms. 
Q. What is a common cause of indigestion? 

Food in unsuitable quality or quantity. 
Q. What does often produce it? 

Over fatigue may often produce it, but alcoholism al- 
ways d( es produce it. 

Q. Why can no general rules be laid down for treatment 
in this disease? 

Because what suits one case will not suit another. 
Q. What is, therefore, first, necessary? 

To discover the cause of the trouble and treat accord- 
ingly. 

Q. What is always important for dyspeptics? 

Exercise in the fresh air and simple food. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 



159 



Peritonitis. 

Q. What is peritonitis? 

It is an inflammation of the membrane which lines 
the abdominal cavity. 

Q. By what is it generally caused? 

By wounds or diseases of the abdomen, or organs cov- 
ered by the peritoneum. 

Q. What are the symptoms? 

Acute pain, with tenderness over the abdomen, fever, 
rapid wiry pulse, great depression, vomiting and constipation 
with tympanites. 

Q. What effects has the disease upon urine? 

Retention or suppression of urine. 
Q. What is not uncommon? 

Delirium. 
Q. How should the patient be kept? 

As quiet as possible and not allowed to sit up for any 
purpose. 

Q. By what should the bed clothes be supported? 

By a cradle. 
Q. What special care must be taken if applications or 
fomentations are ordered? 

To make them as light as possible. 
Q. What nourishment may be given? 

Strictly according to orders of the doctor, usually 
liquids. 

Q. What must be kept warm? 

The knees and feet. 
Q. What must be watched in case opium is ordered? 

The respirations. 
Q. What should be daily looked after? 

That the bowels are kept open. 
Q. What should be worn next to the abdomen? 

A flannel bandage. 
Q. What will be a sure consequence of too early an ex- 
ertion? 

A relapse. 



160 the nursing sister. 

Appendicitis. 

Q. What is appendicitis? 

It is an inflammation of the vermiform appendix. 
Q. By what is it usually accompanied? 

By more or less peritonitis. 
Q. What are the symptoms and what is the treatment? 

Much the same as peritonitis. 
Q. What great danger is always to be feared in this 
disease? 

Perforation of the bowels. 
Q. How is appendicitis often treated? 
By an operation of the laporatomy. 

Sore Throat. 

Q. What does a slight sore throat often accompany? 

Indigestion, constipation and colds. 
Q. How can a slight sore throat be treated? 

Regulate the bowels, eat light food for a day or so, 
gargle the throat with a saturated solution of chloride of 
potash. 

Q. Where should the patient be kept and what should he 
avoid? 

He should be kept in the house, but avoid hot, unven- 
tilated rooms. 

Q. What should be used about the throat? 

Cold water should be used freely about the throat, 
wring out a towel in strong salt water and rub the throat and 
chest well. 

Bronchitis. 

Q, What is bronchitis? 

It is an inflammation of the mucous membrane of the 
bronchial tubes. 

Q. In what form may it appear? 

Either acute or chronic. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 161 

Q. How does the acute bronchitis begin? 

It begins with a heavy cold, sometimes with a slight 
chill. 

Q. What other symptoms appear? 

There is a fullness in the head, sore throat and gen- 
eral sick feeling, with pain in the chest and cough. 
Q. How is the cough? 

At first it is dry, then it is accompanied by watery 
sputa, later on it becomes tough ( viscid ) and like purulent. 

Q. What may arise in case the dysponea (difficulty in 
breathing) increases? 

High fever, rapid pulse and profuse perspiration. 
Q. Where must the patient be kept? 

In one room, well aired, and at an even temperature 
not higher than 68 degrees. 
Q. What must be secured*! 

A free action of the skin and the bowels open. 
Q. What may relieve the pain in the chest? 

A mustard plaster. 
Q. What will allay the cough? 

Steam inhalation. 
Q. What nourishment should be given? 
Plenty of light but nourishing food. 
Q. What special care must be taken during convales- 



cence? 



To avoid sudden changes of temperature. 
Q. For what reason? 

Because the patient is very susceptible to chills. 
Q. What may be looked for in the majority of cases? 

Recovery. 
Q. How does it prove sometimes? 

Fatal or it may assume a chronic form. 

Asthma. 
Q. What is asthma? 

It is a difficulty in breathing (dyspnoea). 



162 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. By what is it caused? 

By a spasmodic contraction of the bronchial tubes. 

Q. What is neceasary for a Sister to know about this 

disease? 

The domestic remedies in case of emergency. 

Q. Is this disease dangerous? 

It is seldom dangerous but always distressing. 
Q. What are the symptoms at the time of the attack? 
The patient gasps violently for air, his expression is 
anxious, pulse feeble, the skin cold and pale or blue. 
What should be done with the patient? 
His arms should be elevated and all possible fresh air 
given him. 

Q. What may be administered to the patient? 

A teaspoonful of Hoffman's anodyne, and repeated af- 
ter half an hour if the condition is not relieved. 
Q. How long may it last? 

Several hours. 
Q. By what is it generally concluded? 

By a paroxysm of coughing and a free expectoration 
of mucous. 

Q. What else besides this will often give relief? 

Saltpeter pestelles, when burned, afford fumes, which 
may give relief by inhaling them. 

Q. What is sometimes used for smoking, either in cigar-: 
ettes or pipe? 

Stamonium. 

Laryngistis. 

Q. What is laryngitis? 

It is an inflammation of the lining membrane of the 
throat, extending into the larynx. 
Q. What may cause it? 

Cold or local irritation. 
Q. What is often associated with it? 

Tuberculous disease. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 163 

Q. Which are the symptoms? 

Hoarseness of voice, sore throat, usually some fever 
and sometimes difficulty in breathing. 
Q. How is it generally treated? 
By steam-inhalations. 

Catarrh. 

Q. What is catarrh? 

It is a cold in the head. 
Q. What is much responsible for the susceptibility to 



cold 



Illy-ventilated rooms and over-heated houses. 
Q. Which are the best preventives? 

Pure air, warm clothing and dry feet. 
Q. What will sometimes cure the cold? 

A full dose of quinine, if taken in the earliest stage. 
Q. What will often cut it short? 

Ten grains of dovers powder, taken at bed time. 
Q. How long does it usually last? 

A few days. 
Q. By what may the discharge from the nose be relieved? 

By inhaling through a paper-cone the vapors arising 
from a solution of pulverized camphor or compound tincture 
of bezoin. 

Q. What is very difficult to overcome? 

Neglected catarrh after it has gone into a condition 
of chronic catarrh. 

Q. What may it finally lead to? 

To dangerous pulmonary diseases. 
Q. What is a peculiar mark of chronic nasal catarrh? 

Strong and offensive odor. 

Dropsy. 

Q. What are some of the symptoms of dropsy? 

An accumulation of fluid under the skin and in the 
cavities of- the body, and shortness of breath. 



16-4 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. Where does a large amount of this fluid sometimes 
accumulate? 

In the peritoneal cavity or lower limbs. 
Q. What will this produce? 

Great distention of the abdomen. 
Q. With what will it interfere? 

With movements of the diaphragm. 
Q. By what must the fluid be removed? 

By tapping. 
Q. What does fluid in the connective tissues produce? 

It produces a swelling. 
Q. Where will this be most marked? 

Where the skin is loose. 
Q. What will pressure of the finger make upon this 
swelling? 

A distinct indention, which does not immediately dis- 
appear when pressure is removed. 

Q. How is this swelling reduced sometimes? 

By tapping the skin with a needle. 
Q. What is necessary after this tapping? 

That the discharging fluid be absorbed in soft cloths. 
Q. What position can such patients most easily acquire? 

Sitting up as straight as possible. 
Q. How should the feet be kept while sitting up? 

Elevated. 
Q. What food is generally given? 

Mostly liquids, no eggs; milk freely. 

Bright's Disease. 

Q. What is Bright's disease? 

Kidney trouble. 
Q. What is present in the urine? 

Albumen. 
Q. From what does the condition commonly described as 
acute Bright's disease result? 



« THE NURSING SISTER. 165 

From taking cold, or as a sequel of scarlet fever, diph- 
theria or rheumatism. 

Q. How is the urine passed? 

It is passed frequently, but diminishes in quantity. 
Q. How is the complexion? 

Waxy. 
Q. About what part of the body can a dropsical condition 
be noticed first? 

About the eyes and feet. 
Q. What other symptoms may be looked for? 

Headache, gastric disorders, and general debility. 
Q. What are frequent complications? 

Bronchitis and heart disease. 
Q. What may follow? 

Suppression of urine, leading to death by ura?mic 
poisoning. 

Q. How may the disease terminate? 

To recovery or lapse into chronic form. 
Q. What is done to carry off the waste product from the 
kidneys? 

The skin action is excited, the bowels are kept open 
and drinks given freely. 

Q. What is sometimes prescribed? 

Hot air baths, and also skimmed milk diet. 
Q. What food can be allowed? 

Only digestible food, and given with the utmost reg- 
ularity. 

0. What must be especially avoided? 

All stimulants, eggs; meat, very little; no pork. 

Renal Colic. 

Q. Where does the pain take its origin in renal colic? 

In the kidney. 
Q. Of what is it generally the result? 

Of a stone in the kidney or ureter. 



166 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. How is the urine? 

It may be retained or discharged frequently, a few 
drops at a time. 

Q. What does the urine often contain? 

Blood or crystalline deposit. 
Q. By what can the pain be relieved? 

Only by hypodermic of morphine. 
Q. What may sometimes be ordered? 

Hot baths or hot applications. 

Nettle Rash or Urticaris. 

Q. How does this rash appear? 

It shows patches of white spots on a red ground on 
various parts of the body, with severe itching. 
Q. By what is it produced? 

By irritation, indigestible food, by certain drugs and 
even occasionally by strong emotions. 
Q. With what may it be treated? 

With applications of tincture of benzoin diluted. 

Eczema. 
Q. What is eczema? 

It is a form of eruption very difficult to cure. 
Q. Is there only one form of eczema? 

No; there are various forms of it, acute or chronic. 
Q. Which is the most characteristic manifestation? 

A raw surface, with moist perspiration, from broken 
blisters, more or less covered with dry crusts. 

Q. What must be done before any curative treatment 
will be of service? 

The crusts must be softened with oil (vaseline) and 
gently removed. 

Q. With what may the affected parts be cleaned? 

With soft potash soap, and then healing ointment 
applied. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 167 

Q* What should be avoided? 

Washing with ordinary soap and water, as well as 
scratching or any rubbing. 

Herpes. 

Q. What is this disease? 

It is an eruption of small blisters, of which there are 
several forms. 

Q. Which is the form most generally known? 

Herpes zoster or shingles. 
Q. Where does it appear? 

On the chest. 
Q. To where does it extend? 

Just half way round from the spinal column to the 
sternum. 

Q. To where is it almost always confined? 

To one side. 
Q. By what is the eruption preceded? 

By pain of a neuralgic character. 
Q. How long may the pain continue? 

Even some time after the blisters have appeared. 
Q. What may be done to relieve it? 

Soothing applications applied. 
Q. How long will it take before the disease will termi- 
nate? 

It is self-limited and will terminate in a few days 

without treatment. 

Itch or Scabies. 

Q. To what is this disease due? 

To a small animal, which burrows under the skin. 
Q. What does it cause? 

A peculiar irritating inflammation. 
Q. W T here does it usually begin? 

Between the fingers and toes, but may spread to other 
parts of the body and become quite general. 



168 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. With what is it commonly treated? 

With sulphur baths and sulphur ointment. 
Q. Is it contagious? 

It is highly contagious and persons affected with it 
should be insolated until cured. 

Q. What should be done with their clothes afterwards? 
They should be disinfected by fumigating with sul- 
phur, or burned. 

Cerebral Apoplexy. 

Q. By what is it caused? 

By rupture cf blood vessels, or an effusion of blood 
into the tissues of the brain. v 

Q. In what age is it most common? 

It is more common before forty years than after. 
Q. How may the attack come on? 

Suddenly, the patient falling to the ground without 
warning, and lying without sense or motion. 
Q. How is the face, pulse and breathing? 

The face is flushed, the pulse is free, the breathing 
noisy as in a deep sleep. 
Q. What may follow? . 

Death may follow at once, or the patient revives from 
the attack. 

Q. What may sometimes precede the attack? 

Warnings, such as a sudden sharp pain in the head, 
with confusion and dizziness. 

Q. How may the second form of the attack come on? 

The patient slides to the ground, fainting and pale. 
Q. What does the patient generally do? 

He revives from this condition. 
Q. But what will generally happen after a few minutes? 
The patient falls into a stupor from which he never 
awakes. 

Q. Which of the two attacks is the most serious? 
The second. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 169 

Q. What is to be done with the patient if an attack in 
the first form occurs, until the doctor comes? 

He should be put in a half-sitting position, shoulders 
and head raised, cold cloths applied to the head, and every- 
thing tight about the throat and body loosened. 
Q. How should the room be kept? 

Cool and quiet. 
Q. What is to be done in the second form? 

The head and shoulders of the patient are raised as in 
the first, but the patient's skin being cold, hot bottles should 
be applied to the legs and feet, and free ventilation given. 

Q. What should be given if it is possible to make the 
patient swallow? 

Fifteen to twenty drops of aromatic spirits of am- 
monia in a half glass of water, given slowly. 

• Q. What food is given to the patient if he recovers from 
the attack? 

Unstimulating, but nourishing; no malt or spirits are 
allowed. 

Q. How must exercise be taken? 

Without heating the body. 
Q. Against what must be guarded? 

Against all exertion which flushes the face. 
Q. Is a bath allowed? 

No hot or cold plunge bath is allowed. 
Q. What may be used instead? 

A tepid sponging daily is best, but the head should not 
be held down over the basin. 

Q. What must be especially avoided? 

All bodily and mental excitement. 

Paralysis. 

Q. By what may it be caused? 

By apoplexy. 

Q. How does it occur? 

Either one side of the bodv is attacked, or the lower 
half. 



170 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. How does it come on? 

'Either suddenly or by a gradual loss of motion or sen- 
sation, or of both in one or more parts of the body? 
Q. What is often the end of paralysis? 

Sudden death. 
Q. What symptoms do sometimes" occur? 

Kemarkable rise of temperature. 

Q. To what is there a very marked tendency in this 

disease? 

To the formation of bed sores. 

Q. What danger often remains, even if the patient sur- 
vives? 

That the attacks recur, and the patient rarely revives 

from more than two or three attacks. 

Q. What is often the main cause of paralysis? 

Chronic alcoholism, poisoning, or a sequel of some 
other disease. 

Q. What kind of diet is given to the patient? 

Liberal diet. 
Q. What is usually employed? 

Massage and electricity. 
Q. How must the paralyzed parts be kept? 

Warm, clean, and free from pressure. 

Q. What is often of the utmost importance in all these 

cases? 

Good nursing, much skill and great patience. 

Neuralgia. 

Q. What is neuralgia? 

It it an acute, painful affection of the nerves, without 
inflammation. 

Q. What causes it? 

The causes are various, and the treatment therefore 
different. 

Q. What may be useful? 
Hot applications. 



the nursing sister. 171 

Epilepsy. 

Q. Among what diseases is this classed? 

Among nervous diseases. 
Q. How does the attack come on? 

The patient, apparently well the moment before, sud- 
denly falls to the ground, frothing at the mouth, and some- 
times uttering a strange cry. 

Q. What is the character of the breathing? 

Difficult, and the body convulsed. 
Q. How is the face? 

Contorted and livid, and there is a choking sound in 
the throat. 

Q. How long will these frightful symptoms last? 

They will pass off in 5 to 15 minutes, and the patient 
lies stupid. 

Q. How long does it take before he recovers? 

' A few hours. 
Q. How does the attack come on in a milder form? 

The patient loses consciousness for a moment, does 
not fall, has fixed look of the eye. 

Q. How long is it before he revives? 

Almost immediately. 
Q. How may it affect the patient? 

The patient may turn pale and slide down quietly 
without making any sound; is insensible. 

Q. How will the patient be after he revives? 

He is confused and languid for the rest of the day. 
Q. Do these attacks return frequently? 

Sometimes at shorter or longer intervals; sometimes 
several times a day. 

Q. Where should the patient be put when the attack 
comes on? 

In the middle of the bed. 
Q. What should be done in case he cannot be moved? 
He should be left lying on the floor, his head raised, 
his clothing unfastened. By no means restrain body move- 
ments. 



172 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What can be done to prevent the tongue from being 
bitten? 

Something should be placed between the teeth. 

Q. What may be applied to the forehead? 

Cloths dipped in cold water. 
Q. How should the feet be kept? 

Warm. 
Q. How should the room be kept? 

Darkened and quiet. 
• Q. How should people live that are liable to this disease? 
Their manner of living should be quiet and very plain. 
Q. What should they avoid chiefly? 

All heating exercises, or going up and down stairs, or 
doing anything that creates dizziness. 

Q. Where should they spend as much time as possible? 
In the open air, and as little as possible over books 
and in business. 

Q. What should they eat? 
Easily digested and nourishing food. 

Hysteria. 

Q. What is hysteria? 

It is a name given to a disordered state of the ner- 
vous system. 

Q. In whom is it most common? 

In girls and young women, though not entirely con- 
fined to them. 

Q. What do these patients generally do? 

They exaggerate more or less intentionally their 
symptoms. 

Q. But what should be remembered? 

That at the basis of these imaginative manifesta 
tions is a real, though perhaps obscure malady. 
Q. To what may hysteria lead? 
To insanity. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 173 

Q. What are the common symptoms? 

A sensation as a ball in the throat, a dry cough very 
abundant and light colored urine, flatulence. 
Q. What does sometimes occur? 

Neuralgia, local paralysis, contraction of the joints 
and loss of voice. 

Q. In what way does a hysterical fit differ from an at- 
tack of epilepsy? 

Hysterical patients scream repeatedly when the fit 
comes on, which epileptics do not. 

Q. What will they never allow to be touched? 

Their eye-lids. 
Q. To what are they very sensitive? 

To the touch. 
Q. Are they stupid and dull after the fit? 

They are rather drowsy. 
Q. What should be done with hysterical patients? 

They should be put on the bed, the clothes loosened. 
Q. With what may the chest and face be slapped? 

With the ends of a towel which has been dipped in 
cold water. 

Q. What will the patient never do if left alone? 

Hurt herself. 
Q. How are such patients successfully treated? 

By rest, seclusion, dieting, massage, electricity and 
sponging. 

Q. What does a nurse need for these things? 

Special training and experience. 
Q. Can any Sister undertake to practice massage? 

Not without having received a thorough training and 
instruction in it. 

Q. Can any Sister practice electrical treatments? 

Never unless she is well informed about it and dis- 
tinctly directed by the doctor. 
Q. Why? 



174 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Because electricity is a powerful agent that can do 
much harm, and therefore requires the greatest care and 
management. 

Chorea or St. Vitus Dance. 

Q. What is St. Titus dance? 

It is a nervous affection, manifested by irregular mus- 
cular action 

Q. In whom does it most frequently occur? 

In young individuals. 
Q. By what is it brought on sometimes? 

By fright or excitement? 
Q. With what is it often associated? 

With rheumatic diathesis. 
Q. By what is it characterized? 

By lack of control of the muscular movements. 
Q. Where does it affect the body? 

On one or both sides. 
Q. By what is this generally accompanied? 

By general debility, and often mental weakness. 
Q. By what are the jerking and twitching motions in- 
creased? 

By any excitement. 
Q. When do these' motions cease? 

During sleep. 
Q. What is essential in treatment? 

Complete bodily and mental rest, nourishing food, 
relief of irritation. 

Cerebral Meningitis. 

Q. What is this disease? 

It is an inflammation of the membrane covering the 
brain and is always extremely serious. 
Q. Which are the leading symptoms? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 175 

High fever, violent headache, intolerance of light and 
noise, vomiting, obstinate constipation, delirium, sometimes 
loss of speech and convulsions. 

Q. What is generally first ordered? 

Cold applications to the head. 
Q. How can they he most easily applied? 

By means of an ice bag. 
Q. What should be done to increase the effect of this ap- 
plication? 

The head should be shaved. 
Q. What else is frequently ordered? 

Leeches. 
Q. What is generally ordered to relieve the obstinate 
constipation? 

purgatives and high-up enemas. 
Q. "How should the patient be kept? 

In a darkened room, as quiet, cool and free from ex- 
citement as possible. 

Q. What kind of food should be given? 

Only such as is permitted by the doctor, which is gen- 
erally milk or thin gruel. 

Q. How long must the patient and room be kept quiet? 

Until all possibility of a relapse is over. 
Q. What does relapse in this case mean? 

Death. 
Q. In what oases may a Sister on her own account give 
an ounce of wine in hot water or beef tea? 

If there should be symptoms of sinking, cold sweat, 
fixed and glassy eyes, stupor, palsy. 

Q. What other symptoms do appear in spinal meningitis? 

Excessive pain in the back, extending to the extrem- 
ities. 

Q. How does the body become? 

It becomes rigid, but from time to time there are con- 
vulsive starts. 

Q. How are the lower limbs affected? 



176 THE NURSING SISTER. 

By paralysis, which gradually extends. 
Q. What can be done in such a case? 

Nothing but follow the directions of the docter. 
Q. What operative treatment is sometimes performed by 
the doctor? 

A lumbar puncture. 
Q. What else is often ordered? 

Leeches, cups and bichloride injections. 
Q. How is a bichloride injection given? 

Have a special syringe for it, mix the bichloride with 
the water in a glass or porcelain dish, then add salt as much 
as the water (in which the bichloride is dissolved) will dis- 
solve. Then have everything ready and put the bichloride 
into the syringe at the side of the bed and inject at once deep 
under the muscles. The syringe must be cleaned at once. 

Rheumatism. 

Q. From what does inflammatory rheumatism or acute 
rheumatic fever result? 

From exposure to cold and damp. 
Q. By what is it characterized? 

By inflammation of the white fibrous tissue about the 
joints and in the wall of the large arteries and valves of the 
heart. 

Q. By what may it possibly be developed? 

By malarial poisoning. 
Q. Which are the local symptoms in the acute form? 
Feyer-heat, redness, swelling and pain about one or 
more of the large joints. 

Q. To what has this a tendency? 

To shift from joint to joint. 
Q. By what are these symptoms acompanied? 

By profuse perspiration, having a characteristic odor. 
Q. How is the urine? 

It is likely to be scanty and high-colored. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 177 



Q. What may accompany severe cases? 

Nervous disorders and mild delirium at night. 
Q What is the greatest danger in inflammatory rheu- 
matism. 

That the heart gets involved. 
Q. What position should be maintained* 

A horizontal position. 
Q. Why? 

Because the slightest motion causes an agonizing pain? 
Q. What must be avoided? 

All excitement, and in no case stimulants are given 
except when ordered by the doctor. 

Q. What kind of food may be given? 

Light, digestible food. 
Q. How should the patient be dressed? 

Warmly in flannel. 
Q. When the case has become chronic, where should the 
patient then live if possible? 

In a dry climate. 
Q. What must be carefully avoided? 

Sudden change of temperature. 
Q. On what days must the patient not go out? 

On cold, damp days. 
Q. What kind of underwear should the patient wear? 

Flannel from throat to ankles, summer and winter. 

Points to be Noticed in Gtving Stimulants in Fevers. 

Q. When may stimulants be recognized as helpful to the 
patient? 

If after taking them the tongue and skin becomes 
moist, the pulse steadier, the breathing more tranquil, delir- 
ium quieted, sleep induced. 

Q. Where are they doing harm? 

If the reverse effects follow, the tongue and skin 

becoming dry, the pulse quicker, the breathing hurried. 
—12 



178 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What must be done in this case? 
They must be stopped. 

Malarial, or Intermittent Fever. 

Q. What does the most common form of this fever ex- 
hibit? 

Three stages. 

Q. With what is the patient first seized? 

With a chill, more or less violent and prolonged. 
Q. How does he feel during this time? 

Cold, but the temperature rises rapidly. 
Q. What other symptoms appear? 

Severe headache, nausea and pain in the limbs. 
Q. By what is the feeling of chilliness succeeded? 

By a hot stage. 
Q. What symptoms accompany this stage? 

High temperature, flushed face, dry and hot skin. 
Q. What will finally, perhaps after a few hours, follow? 

Profuse sweating, during which the temperature falls 
and the other acute symptoms subside. 
Q. How do the attacks occur? 

Periodically, with intervals of fairly good feeling. 
Q. What is required for this disease? 

Constitutional treatment and sometimes change of 
climate. 

Q. What can a nurse do during the chill? 

She can relieve the discomfort by the use of warm 
blankets, hot bottles, etc. 

Q. How can she relieve the fever? 

By tepid sponging and cooling drinks. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 179 



SIXTH CHAPTER. 



Temperature, Pulse, Respiration and Urine. 
Q. What vital signs are more or less intimately con- 
nected in sickness? 

Temperature, pulse and respiration. 
Q. What is the cause of this connection? 

That what affects one will also affect the other. 
Q. Which of the three are the more readily disturbed? 

The pulse and respiration. 
Q. Which of these symptoms express more correctly 
the condition of the patient? 

The variations of the temperature. 
Q. What often causes alterations in the pulse and respi- 
rations with children? 

Sleep, anger, suckling and slight indigestion. 
Q, Are these respirations of great importance? 

ISTot unless accompanied with changes in the temper- 
ature. 

Q. In whom are the variations more important? 

In adults. 
Q. What is the normal temperature of adults? 

Ninety-eight and four to six-tenths degrees. 
Q. What should, therefore, be carefully noted in adults? 

The first variation from the normal temperature. 
Q. Is this deviation in all cases of special importance? 

No; if it is only for a day. 

Q. What is a sure sign that there is probably something 

wrong? 

If the temperature on the morning of the second day 

is higher than the first, and by noon still higher. 



] 80 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. For what does an increase of temperature call? 

For cooling remedies, external and internal. 
Q. What does a decrease of temperature require? 

Warming and sustaining treatment. 
Q. What must be carefully noted? 

The hour at which the rise or fall of temperature 
takes place. 

Q. What is a bad sign in the increase of temperature? 

If the increase begins a little earlier each day. 
Q, What is a more favorable sign? 

If it begins a little later every day. 
Q. What is a good sign in the decrease in temperature? 

If the decrease begins a little later every day. 
Q. What is a bad indication? 

If it begins late* each day. 
Q. What else is important to consider in regard to tem- 
perature? 

The duration. 
Q. What is a bad sign in the duration? 

A long continued high temperature without a fall. 
Q. What is an encouraging sign? 

A long continued low temperature. 
Q. What is dangerous in itself regarding temperature? 

A very high temperature, say 105 degrees. 
Q. When is it more dangerous? 

If it has come on gradually as the last of a progressive 
series, the temperature having grown daily higher by half a 
degree or more, and having become daily higher by an hour or 
so earlier. 

Q, What should a fall from a high temperature below the 
normal point, say two degrees, make probable? 

It would make death probable. 
Q. In what case would there be prospects of restoration? 

If the fall be not more than four-tenths of a degree 
below normal. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 181 

Q. What is, generally speaking, more dangerous, the fall 
or rise from the normal point? 

One degree below normal is more indication of a bad 
condition than two and a half degrees above the normal. 
Q. In what does the danger consist in the first case? 
In the degree of depression, then in continuance, then 
in descending progression. 

Q. What does the slowly increasing low temperature gen- 
erally do? 

It will prepare the way to serious sickness or death? 
Q. What else is striking, besides the variations of the 
temperature from the normal point? 

The daily and hourly fluctuations. 
Q. How much of a rise in temperature will a well-fed 
child show after a good meal? 

A few tenths of a degree. 
Q. How much will the temperature of a hungry child run 
up after taking nourishing food? 
A full degree. 
Q. If there is no rise of temp ?rature during convalescence 
after eating, what does this prove? 

That there is no nourishment secured from the food. 
Q. What does it prove if there be a sudden or high rise 
above one degree? 

That the food was too stimulating or heavy. 
Q. What should always be the effect of food during con- 
valescence, to be beneficial? 

It should increase the temperature a quarter to a 
half degree. 

Q. When should this increase subside? 
When digestion is over. 

Pulse. 

Q. Does the increase or decrease in the number of pulsa- 
tions in a minute always prove a variation from the healthy 

pulse? 

Xo. 



182 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. Which are qualities to notice in the pulse? 

Frequency, regularity and fullness. 
Q. How does a healthy pulse beat? 

Steadily, evenly, from seventy to seventy-five times a 
minute. 

Q. In what way are the number of pulsations affected by 
the position of the body? 

They are more rapid in standing than in sitting 
down, and more in sitting than lying down. 
Q. How may its regularity be interfered? 

In two ways: the pulsations may be unequal in num- 
ber and force, as few beats being from time to time more 
rapid and feeble than the rest, or intermitted altogether. 
Q. By what is the fullness of the pulse determined? 

By the sensation, the blood when passing through the 
artery, gives to the finger. 

Q. When is the pulse said to be full? 

If it strikes a larger part of the finger pressing it. 
Q. When small? 

If it strikes a small part of the finger. 
Q. When hard? 

If in spite of firm pressure it forces its way under the 
finger. 

Q. When soft? 

When the pulsations scarcely cause a sensation to the 
fingers. 

Q. When is it said to be wiry? 

When the pulsations are hard and small, the flow feel- 
ing like a wire. 

Q. When jerking? 

When the blood comes with hard, short knocks. 
Q. When must all these different conditions be carefully 
considered? 

When the pulse is examined as an indication of dis- 
ease or health. 

Q. What is extremely difficult to ascertain with young 
children? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 183 

The number of pulsations in a minute. 
Q. What are, therefore, the things important to be 
noticed in examining the pulse of young children? 
The regularity and fulness. 

Respirations. 

Q. How often does a healthy adult breathe? 

Sixteen to eighteen times in a minute, without being 
conscious of the act of breathing. 

Q. What must be noticed in sickness besides the varia- 
tions from the healthy standard in number? 

Whether the breathing is even and regular, or panting 
and short; whether it is from the upper or lower part of the 
chest. 

Q. What must be noticed regarding pain? 

Whether a deep, full inspiration can be taken without 
pain, and if there is pain, at what spot the pain is felt. 
Q. What must be noticed about the position? 

Whether the breathing is better in one position than 
in another, and in which it is the most distressing. 
Q. What should be noticed about the sounds? 

Whether the air makes any sounds as it passes through 
the lungs and air passes, and what kind of^a sound. 
Q. What about the difference in breathing? 

Whether there be any difference between the breath- 
ing when asleep and when awake, and what is it. 

• . Urine. 

Q. What is drained away through the kidneys with the 

urine? 

Many of the impurities of the blood and any excess of 

its watery ingredients. 

Q. What is constantly changing in the urine? 

The chemical composition. 



184 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. In what respect are there continual changes going on 
in the urine even with healthy persons? 

In color and quantity daily passed. 
Q. Which is the normal color of urine? 

Light amber or wheat straw. 
Q. What is the daily normal quantity? 

From thirty to fifty ounces. 
Q. What is always the reaction in health? 

Acid. 
Q. What is the effect upon blue litmus paper? 

It will turn red. 
Q. When is it most acid? 

Just before eating, especially before breakfast. 
Q. When is it less acid? 

During the process of digestion. 
Q. How does it vary with age? 

In children the quantity in proportion to the weight 
of the body is nearly twice as great as with adults. 
Q. How does urine vary with sex? 

The quantity being somewhat more abundant with 
females than males. 

Q. How with season? 

Less being passed in warm dry weather, than at 
other times. 

Q. What is the reason for this? 

Because the perspiration is generally more profuse 
and liquids pass off by the skin. 

Q. How does it vary with the time of the day? 

It is more deeply colored in the morning, paler dur- 
ing the forenoon, and deeper again in the afternoon and 
evening. 

Q. Does food and drink cause any difference? 

Many vegetables, acid fruits, liquids, etc., increase the 
quantity and produce other changes. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 185 

Q. What else causes certain chemical changes in the 
urine? 

Violent exercise. 

Q. What effect has mental exertion, over-study or hys- 
teria upon it? 

It increases the quantity of urine passed. 
Q. Is the variation for one or two days from the normal 
condition of importance? 
No. 
Q. When should attention he given to the matter? 

If the variations be frequent and long continued and 
especially if accompanied by other symptoms. 

Q. What should be carefully noticed and reported in the 
different illnesses? 

Every variation from the healthy condition. 
Q. What do they indicate? 

The presence and progress of the disease. 
Q. From what should a specimen for examination be 
taken? 

Either from the total accumulation of twenty-four 

hours or from that passed before breakfast. 

Q. What care must be taken in getting a specimen of 
urine for examination? 

To have it free from all impurities. 
Q. How much will generally be wanted? 

From three, six or eight ounces. 
Q. In what kind of bottles should the urine for examin- 
ation be preserved? 

In clean, clear bottles. 
Q. How should these bottles be cleaned? 

First with warm water, then with cold water, and 
from time to time be boiled. 

Q. How should the corks be? 

Either new or washed and scraped. 



186 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. What must be attached to the bottle? 

A label with the name of the patient, number of the 
room, the date and hour at which the urine was passed. 
Q. What more must the nurse be able to tell? 

What was eaten and what was the mental condition 
of the patient, whether any pain was felt or difficulty in pass- 
ing urine. 

Q. When must the urine be examined? 

The same day it was passed. 
Q. For what reason? 

If it stands longer it will decompose. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 187 



SEVENTH CHAPTER. 



Disinfecting and Care in Communicable Diseases. 

Q. What is in communicable diseases one of the greatest 
responsibilities of a nurse? 

The prevention of its spreading. 
Q. What is considered the most common conductor of 
contagion? 

The atmosphere, which is everywhere, more or less 
laden with microbes, especially in the sick room. 
Q. What are they? 

They are the lowest form or animal life soaring in the 
air, which we inhale. 
Q. Are they visible? 

Only under the microscope. 
Q. What are they capable of? 

Of a very rapid multiplication. 
Q. What do they convey? 

The specific poison. 
Q. In what state do they sometimes remain for a time? 

Dormant. 
Q. What do they do under suitable conditions? 

They develop and multiply. 
Q. What do they then produce? 

The original disease. 
Q. Where are the conditions of development found in 
some cases? 

Within the body. 
Q. How can the disease be transmitted in such cases? 

Directly from one person to another. 
Q. What does the germ do in other cases? 

It only originates in the body. 



188 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What does it require before it becomes infectious? 

That it be developed outside. 
Q. Which are the latter class? 

Typhoid, yellow fever, cholera, dysentery. 
Q. Of what are the other diseases commonly recognized 
as infectious? 

By direct transmisson. 
Q. What is required after the exposure to contagion? 

Some time for development. 
Q. How do we call the time during which the poison 
remains inactive? 

The period of incubation. 
Q. When does smallpox commence to be contagious? 

Even during the period of incubation. 
Q. When is the risk of infection the greatest in measles 
and whooping cough? 

Early in the disease, even before the rash and whoop 
appear. 

Q. When is infection most dangerous in scarlet fever? 
During the third and fourth week when the skin is 
peeling. 

Q. How far does the poison of typhus appear to exert its 
influence? 

Only within a limited range. 
Q. How must the contact with the patient be in order to 
cause infection? 

Moderately close. 
Q. But how may the germs of smallpox and scarletina be 
carried about? 

Indefinitely. 
Q. What name have we for diseases which attack many 
people at the same time? 
Epidemic. 
Q. What are disinfectants? 

Substances that destroy or render inert the germs of 
communicable diseases. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 189 

Q. What is the best disinfectant? 

Fresh air. 

Q. What will destroy the activity of all known disease 

germs? 

Boiling for one-half hour. 

Q. What should be done when the disease is declared? 

The patient should at once be isolated as entirely as 
possible. 

Q. How many persons should be attendants? 

Not more than two. 
Q. What must they avoid? 

All contact with others. 

Q. What must be carried out of the room? 

All unnecessary articles and things that cannot be 
washed. 

Q. Where should spoons, cups, etc., be kept that are used 

for the patient? 

Near the room and should be washed there. 

Q. What must be especially disinfected in cases of 

typhoid fever and dysentery? 

The excrements and vessels. 

Q. What should be poured down the closet from time to 

time? 

Some disinfectant. 

Q. What should be done where there is nothing but an 
outside closet or privy? 

Some liquid disinfectant must be used and shovels- 
ful of chloride of lime thrown down now and then. The 
stools should be disinfected and buried in the ground, a fresh 
place being prepared each day. 

Q. What must be done after the disease is ended in order 

to render the room fit for occupancy and to prevent the spread 

of infection? 

The room must be thoroughly disinfected and fumi- 
gated. 

Q. How can this be done? 



190 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Spread out all the bed clothes and also all other 
clothes, open all the drawers and doors of wardrobes, wash- 
stands, etc., close the windows and shutters tight, stop up all 
the cracks, chimney and key-hole tight, then it is ready for 
disinfecting. 

Q. Where is the disinfectant then placed? 

In the middle or in different places of the room. 
Q. What is used for disinfecting? 

Formaldehyde gas or sulphur fumes. 
Q. How is it used? 

Have the lamp in the middle of the room, or if more 
than one is used at different places, light them and close the 
door. 

Q. What may be used besides this? 

Either chloride of lime and sulphuric acid, sulphur 
candles or some other disinfectant? 

Q. What must the Sister do after she has started the 
disinfectant? 

Immediately leave the room and close it tight. 
Q. How long should it remain closed? 
From twelve to twenty-four hours. 
Q. What must then be done? 

The windows and doors should then be opened wide 
and the room thoroughly ventilated for several hours. 

Q. What will render the disinfecting gas more effective? 
If the room can be filled with steam just before the 
disinfectants are placed in operation. 

Q. What must be done after the room is thoroughly ven- 
tilated? 

It must be cleaned. 

Q. What will be necessary in some cases? 

That the furniture, wall and everything in the room 
be washed off with a solution of bichloride water. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 191 



EIGHTH CHAPTER. 



Surgical Nursing. 

Q. What is the first requisite in surgical nursing? 

Absolute cleanliness. 
Q. What must be faultlessly clean? 

(1) Everything used about the wounds, patient and 
the bed. 

(2) The places where dressings, instruments, etc., 
are kept. 

(3) Everything about the person and dress of those 
engaged in surgical work. 

Q. To whom does the care of these things belong? 

To the Sister. 
Q. When must all instruments be cleaned and sterilized? 

Before and after using them for dressing a wound. 
Q. What should not be allowed if oil or vaseline is re- 
quired? 

To put the finger into the bottle; take out a little 
with a spatul or a piece of gauze. 

Q. What must be done if any is left? 

It must be thrown away. 
Q. What must never be done with dressings taken from 
a wound? 

They must never be carried around from one bed to 
another. 

Q. What should be done with them? 

They must be removed from the room at once. 
Q. What should be done with dressings which have been 
next to the wound? 

They should be burnt, not washed. 



192 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. What must be done with such as are to be washed? 

They must be disinfected. 
Q. What should be avoided in handling dressings? 

To soil your own hands. 
Q. In what should old dressings be carried away? 

In a basin or pail. 
Q, In what case should the fingers not be used? 

If forcep will do just as well. 
Q. In what must the hands always be washed before go- 
ing from one case to another? 

In a disinfecting solution. 

Q. What should a Sister do if the skin on her hand is 

broken, before going near a wound? 

She should protect them with strips of plaster or col- 
lodion. 

Q. What may be the consequence of a slight scratch? 

To get blood-poison infection. 

Q. Upon what cannot too much importance be laid? 

Upon the necessity of absolute cleanliness in every 
way. 

Q. What is cleanliness in its broadest sense? 

The best antiseptic. 
Q. What is of the greatest importance? 

To have the hands clean, especially finger-nails. 

Q. Why? 

Because organic matter will And a lodgment under 
them. 

Q. Is this organic matter always dangerous? 

Yes. 

Q. What has it undoubtedly been often the source of? 

Of many a case of blood-poisoning. 

Q. What is important before beginning a surgical 

dressing? 

To have everything ready likely to be needed. 

Q. What is awkward for the nurse and fatiguing for the 

patient? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 



193 



When a nurse has to leave in the midst of a process, 
to find something that has been forgotten. 

Q. What can a Sister not always tell when a doctor 
dresses a wound the first time? 

What he may just call for. 
Q. But what must she always have ready? 

The things she knows he will want. 
Q. What should the Sister certainly know after she has 
seen the dressing once? 

How to prepare for it the next'time. 
Q. What will be wanted in every case? 

A protector for the bed ( rubber sheet or Kelly cush- 
ion), towels, scissors, pins and basins. 
Q. How many basins must be ready? 

At least three— one to hold the fluid for washing the 
wound (irrigator), one to receive the old dressings and one to 
hold under to catch the discharge. 

Q. What kind of basins are most convenient to catch up 
the discharge? 

Crescent shaped, as they fit closely to any part of the 
body. 

Q. What should never be done with old dressings? 

They should never be pulled off forcibly. 
Q. What should be done if they stick to the wound? 
They should be irrigated until wet enough to come off 
easily. 

Q. How should adhesive plaster strips be removed? 

By taking hold of both ends and pulling them toward 
the wound from both directions evenly. 

Q. What may be well to apply before removing: the 
plaster? 

New strips between the old ones. 
Q. What will this prevent? 

The wound from being pulled open. 
Q. What will remove the traces from plaster? 
Alcohol, ether or turpentine. 
—13 



194 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What must a Sister do if she is obliged to leave a 

wound undressed? 

Cover it with gauze temporarily. 

Q. What may be used for this purpose? 

A piece of gauze, dry or saturated in an antiseptic so- 
lution. 

Q. What should be done with dressings before they are 

thrown into the waste pail? 

The fluid must be drained off. 

Q. What must be done before dressings are applied? 

The wound should be irrigated with some antiseptic 

solution, but never rubbed. 

Q. What is seldom necessary? 

To touch the wound. 

Q. With what should the edges be dried? 

With the safest lint. 

Q. How are severe burns or excessive wounds best 

dressed? 

Only one part at a time. 

Q. What kinds of dressings are best? 

Dry or absorbent dressings. 

Q, For what reason? 

Because moisture promotes the development of germs 

and this is absorbed by absorbent dressings. 

Q. What is the purpose of antiseptic treatment? 

The destruction of infectious germs or the prevention 

of their multiplication. 

Q. Do antiseptics do this? 

Yes; they hinder the development of the germs and 

arrest their decomposition. 

Q. What is largely used for washing wounds? 

Freshly boiled water, cooled in covered vessels. 

Q. How are dressings sterilized? 

By heat. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 195 

Q. Are chemical disinfectants necessary to sterilize them 
thoroughly? 

No. 
Q. What is the most reliable disinfectant and germicide? 

Bichloride of mercury. 
Q. What else may be used? 

Carbolic acid? 
Q. Is it necessary to give full directions for the different 
dressings? 

No; because each doctor has his own method and new 
ones are coming in vogue from time to time. 

Q. But with what has the nurse to be familiar? 

With the use of the most popular germicides. 
Q. What should she understand well? 

How to manipulate and prepare them for use. 
Q. In what form is bichloride of mercury bought? 

In a coarse white powder or in tablets. 
Q. In what is it soluble? 

In boiling water or alcohol. 
Q. Of what strength is it commonly used? 

Varying from 1-1000 parts to 1-1500. 
Q. How can you prepare a solution of 1-10,000? 

By dissolving thirty grains of powder in three and 
one-half pints of boiling water. 

Q. What should be added if the solution is not used at 



once? 



Thirty grains of common salt. 
Q. Why should the salt be added? 

Because otherwise the solution is likely to decompose. 
Q. What is the strongest solution used in surgery? 

A solution of 1-1000. 
Q. Upon what have bichloride solutions a corrosive 



effect? 



Upon metals. 
Q. For what purpose can it therefore not be used? 
For disinfecting instruments. 



196 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. By what are gauze bandages and other materials used 
for dressings rendered antiseptic? 

By impregnation of bichloride after prescribed meth- 
ods, by being subjected to a high degree of heat. 
Q. How does carbolic acid come when pure? 

In transparent crystals. 
Q. What is the strongest solution commonly used? 

One to twenty parts. 
Q. How can carbolic acid be liquified? 

By placing the bottle containing the crystals into 
hot water. 

Q. How can you prepare a twenty per cent, solution? 
By pouring out one ounce of the carbolic acid and add - 
ing nineteen ounces of boiling water. 

Q. What must be done after they are poured together? 
Shaken vigorously until they are thoroughly mixed. 
Q. Where must all carbolized solutions and dressings be 

kept? 

In air-tight receptacles. 

Q. For what reason? 

Because they easily evaporate and then lose their 
strength. 

Q. Why must they both be handled with great care? 

Because they are both powerful poisons. 
Q. What symptoms may they sometimes produce? 

Toxic or poisoning symptoms. 
Q. When should a nurse always be on the lookout for 
constitutional effects? 

When any powerful drug is used as an antiseptic. 
Q. What secretions should be carefully watched when 
carbolic acid is employed? 
The urine. 
Q. What is one of the earliest symptoms of this poison- 
ing? 

A dark green color of the urine. 

Q. What materials are most frequently used for surgical 
dressings? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 



Plain, sterilized gauze, iodoform, bi-chloride or car- 
bolized gauze, absorbent cotton, cotton wool, lint, etc. 

Q. What sutures are used for bringing the edges of a 
wound together, holding them in place? 

Silk, siiverwire, cat gut or silkworm gut, horse hair. 
Q. What is used for tying arteries? 

Ligatures of silk or cat gut. 
Q. How are these sutures and ligatures prepared? 

In various methods. 
Q. Are sponges used frequently for operations? 

No; they are seldom used. 
Q. In case they are used, how must they be treated? 

They must be thoroughly cleaned and made aseptic. 

Q. What is used instead of sponges? 

Cotton and gauze, sterilized, or pieces of aseptic 
gauze." 

Q. Is the care of sponges, dressing materials and in- 
struments used for operations, an important part of a sur- 
geon's nurse? 

Yes: one of the most important. 
Q. What else should she make herself acquainted with? 

With the names of the instruments. 
Q. Why? 

So she can hand them without hesitation when called 
for by the operator. 

Q. What is she expected to do after an operation? 

To clean the instruments and return them to their 
cases. 

Q. How must this be done? 

Thoroughly, so that they are aseptically clean. 
Q. How must they be washed? 

Carefully, because they are expensive and many of 
them so delicate that they will be ruined by careless hand- 
ling. 

Q. How should instruments with cutting edges be 
washed? 



198 THE NURSING SISTER. 

They must be taken by themselves and washed one 
by one. 

Q. Should they ever be thrown in a heap together? 

Never, but singly laid down, so that they will touch 
nothing to blunt their fine edges. 

Q. What should be done with all instruments as far as 
practicable? 

They should be disjointed, catches unlocked and tubes 
syringed. 

Q. What should be washed off the instruments with soap 
-and water before they are put in any disinfectant? 
The blood. 
Q. What must be removed? 

Every stain. 
Q. How should rough surfaces be cleaned? 
They should be scrubbed with a brush. 
Q. How can instruments, entirely of metal, be disin- 
fected? 

By sterilizing them ten to fifteen minutes. 

Q. What instruments may not be put into hot water? 

Those having ivory or bone handles. 
Q. Why? 

Because it would be liable to crack them. 
Q. How can they be disinfected after they are washed? 

They may be laid to soak in 1-20 carbolic solution. 
Q. What must be done before they are laid away? 

They must be perfectly dry. 

Wounds. 

Q. What is an incised wound? 

A simple smooth cut like that of a knife. 
Q. In what proportion is it dangerous? 

In proportion to its depth and location. 
Q. What is a wound called if the edges are torn? 

A lacerated wound. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 199 

Q. Which is more painful, a lacerated cut or a sharp in- 
cision of the same extent? 
A lacerated one. 
Q. What can be more easily controlled in a lacerated 
wound? 

A hemorrhage. 

Q. What is a crush or bruise? 

A laceration under the skin (subcutaneous). 
Q. By what is a crush or bruised wound generally made? 

By a blunt instrument. 
Q. What will set up around the dead parts if the tissues 
are injured beyond recovery? 

Ulceration. 
Q. What will ulceration do in a wound? 

It will separate the tissues. 
Q. As what is this ulceration known? 

As sloughing. 

Q. What are gun-shot wounds called? 
i 
Crushed or tubular wounds. 

Q. Are they painful? 

Yes; they are very painful. 
Q. By what are they likely to be accompanied? 

By deep-seated inflammation. 
Q. What are punctured wounds? 

Those made by a sharp-pointed instrument. 
Q. In what proportion are burns dangerous? 

In proportion to the extent of surface they involve, 
rather than their depth. 

Q. In what will a burn, covering half the surface of the 
body, result? 

In death, from shock. 
Q. Is there any prospects of recovery if so much as one- 
third of the surface is burned? • 

Yes. 
Q. What is sojiietimes in great danger in severe burns? 

The vitality of the part. 



200 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What will often be the consequence in such cases? 

The gangrenous part will slough off gradually with 
free formation of pus. 

Q. How does such a wound heal? 

Slowly by granulation. 
Q. What are similar in effects to burns? 

Scalds and frost-bites. 
Q. How many degrees are there of frost-bites? 

Two. 
Q. What appearance have the frost-bitten parts if the 
vitality is merely suspended? 

White, stiff and numb. 

Q. What tendency do they develop upon return of circu- 
lation? 

An inflammatory. 

Q. Does vitality remain in the second degree? 

No, it is completely destroyed. 
Q. What supervenes upon thawing? 

Gangrene. 
Q. How many modes are there by which a wound of the 
soft tissues may heal? 
Two. 
Q. What is the first? 

When two cleanly cut surfaces brought into close con- 
tact simply grow together. 
Q. What is the second? 

Granulation . 
Q. By what may the healing of the granulating surfaces 
be hastened? 

By skin-grafting. 
Q. In what does this consist? 

In placing upon it small portions of skin freshly cut 
from some parts of the patient, or some other individual body. 
Q. What precautions must be taken in grafting? 

The place where the skin is taken from must be anti- 
septically prepared. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 201 

Q. What is an abscess? 

It is an accumulation of pus in any of the tissues or 
organs. 

Q. What are drainage tubes used for? 

To keep wounds open until they heal from the bottom 
and to carry off the pus. 

Q. What are drainage tubes mostly made of. 

Of rubber or glass, with holes in the sides, so that the 
pus may flow in from every direction. 

Q. What may be used for the same purpose? 

Strips of iodoform gauze and antiseptica'.ly prepared 
horse hair. 

Q. What is pus? 

Healthy pus is a thick, cream-colored, opaque dis- 
charge, smooth and insoluble in water. 

Q. By what is the formation of pus accompanied? 

By pain and throbbing. 
Q. By what is it accompanied if extensive? 

By fever and sometimes chills. 
Q. How does it affect the system? 

It is a steady drain. 
Q. What must a patient suffering from a suppurating 
wound therefore have? 

The most nourishing food to keep up his strength. 
Q. In what does the treatment of wounds consist? 
(1). In checking the hemorrhage. 
(2). In removing foreign matters. 
(3). In bringing separated surfaces into opposition. 
{A ). In excluding the air by some antiseptic dressing. 
Q. Is it allowed to put two bad cases with suppurating 
wounds together into adjoining beds in a ward? 
No, if it can be avoided. 

Operations. 

Q. How should the patient be prepared for the operation? 
By giving a full bath and a physic the evening before. 



202 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. How should the part which is to he operated on be 
prepared? 

It should be shaved, then washed thoroughly with a 
brush and green soap, rinsed with sterilized water. 
Q. How can all the soap be removed? 
By washing the part with alcohol. 
Q. What must the Sister do after she has washed the 
part with alcohol? 

Wash her own hands in soap and water, and then in 
an antiseptic solution. 

Q. How is the part to be operated upon then prepared? 
A bichloride dressing is then applied, or a green soap 
poultice, and held in place with a bandage. 

Q. May the patient to be operated on eat a full supper 
the evening before? 

No, only a light supper. 
Q. What should be given on the morning of the opera- 



tion? 

A thorough enema. 

Q. How long before the etherization must the patient 

fast entirely? 

At least three hours. 

Q. What, as a rule, is given to the patient about five or 

six hours before the operation? 

A large cup of beef tea. 

Q. What may be given one half hour before the oper- 

tion? 

A dose of brandy or whisky or one-fourth of a grain of 

morphine hypodermically; or strychnine, if the doctor or- 
ders it. 

Q. What must the patient do before going to the op- 
erating room? 

Pass the urine. 
Q. How should the hair be arranged? 
Well combed and braided tightly. 
Q. What must be taken out and what must be loosened? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 203 

Artificial teeth must be taken out and tight clothes 

and bands loosened, especially about the neck. 

Q. What clothes should be put on the patient? 

A clean chemise, night gown and stockings. 

Q. How should the clothing be arranged? 

So that they will be out of the way, well protected 

and easy to change if necessary. 

Q. Where is the patient taken when ready for operation? 

Into the anaesthetizing room. 

Q. What is put on the patient there? 

A pair of sterilized, cotton-flannel stockings, reaching 

up to the thighs. 

Q. What is used for anaesthetizing? 

Ether, chloroform, or a mixture of the two. 

Q. How is ether administered? 

Pour two or three drams at a time on an inhaler 

made large enough to fit over nose and mouth. 

Q. What will prevent irritation to that part of the face 

which is covered by the cone? 

Anointing it with vaseline. 

Q. How is chloroform given? 

A few drops are sprinkled on a handkerchief or a 

small cone and held at a distance of two or three inches from 

the face. 

Q. What must be avoided? 

Touching the patient's face with the cone. 

Q. For what reason? 

Because a mixture of atmospheric air is needed. 

Q. In what way is chloroform a better anaesthetic than 

ether. 

It is more agreeable, rapid and less likely to nauseate. 

Q. In what way is it more dangerous? 

It has a powerful depressing effect upon the heart. 

Q. In what position must the patient be kept while 

under the influence of an anaesthetic? 



204 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Flat and the head low. 
Q. What are the signs of danger? 

A feeble pulse, a livid face or extreme pallor, irregular 
and gasping respirations. 

Q. Is the Sister who is charged with giving the anaes- 
thetic allowed to give her attention to anything else at the 

time? 

No. 

Q. Why? 

Because the patient before her requires her undivided 

attention. 

Q, Where should she keep her finger and her eyes? 

The finger on the pulse and the eyes on the face of 

the patient. 

Q. What should she do at the first warning indication? 

Stop giving the vapor. 

Q. Under whose direction and in whose presence should 

an anaesthetic be given? 

Always under the direction and in the presence of the 

doctor. 

Q. Where is the patient taken after he is anaesthetized? 

- Into the operating room and placed on the operating 
table. 

Q. What has the Sister to do there? 

After having prepared herself for assistance at an 
operation, she removes the dressing and surrounds the operat- 
ing field with sterilized or bi-chloride towels. 

Q. What must be placed over the operating field? 

After it is washed again, a piece of sterilized or bi- 
chloride gauze is placed over it until the operator is ready. 
Q. How is the operating room prepared? 

It must be antiseptically clean, well ventilated and 
warmed. 

Q. With what should everything therein be washed off? 
With a bichloride solution. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 205 

Q. What must be done with basins, dressings, towels, 
etc., used at the operation, and the clothes of those assisting 
at the operation? 

They must be sterilized. 

Q. How long are clothes and dressings to be sterilized in 

steam? 

Forty-five minutes. 

Q. Where are dressings, sutures and other articles placed 

which will be needed at the operation? 

On the dressing table. 

Q. How should the Sister prepare herself for assisting at 

an operation? 

First, wash her hands thoroughly with brush and 

soap for five minutes, then trim the finger-nails to the quick. 

Q. What will she then put on? 

A white sterilized overdress and also a white veil. 

Q. What is to be done next with her hands? 

They are again washed with brush and soap for five 

minutes, then with alcohol or sterilized water two to three 

minutes. 

Q. What must she do last? 

Immerse the hands in a bichloride solution for two 

minutes. 

Q. Are the hands always prepared with the solutions? 

No; if the operator wishes another method, it must 

be followed. 

Q. After having washed her hands, is the Sister allowed 

to touch anything not sterilized? 

No. 

Q. How many nurses generally assist at operations? 

Three or four. 

Q. How many handle the instruments? 

Only one. 

Q. What will the others do? 



206 THE NURSING SISTER. 

One gives the anaesthetic, the other gets and hands 
what may he needed or called for. 

Q. What must the Sister especially guard at operations? 

Her eyes, avoiding everything that she is not obliged 
to see and by all means preserve her dignity and modesty. 
Q. What is done after the operation? 

The wound is dressed and bandages applied. 
Q. On what is the patient then placed? 

On the wheel-stretcher and taken back to bed. 
Q. How must the bed be prepared? 

Everything must be perfectly fresh and clean. 
Q. What may be used in place of a pillow? 

A towel. 

Q. What should be placed in the bed some time before 

the patient returns? 

Several hot water bottles, well protected and cov- 
ered. 

Q. Why should they be well covered? 

That they may not cause serious burns while the 
patient is under the anaesthetic. 

Q. What will check the nausea somewhat? 

By applying a compress saturated with vinegar near 
the mouth and nostrils, so the patient will inhale the vinegar 
vapor. 

Q. How should the patient be kept? 

Warm and as quiet as possible, and free from all ex- 
citement. 

Q. What must not be allowed under any circumstances? 

To sit up for any purpose. 
Q. How should the wound made by the operation be ar- 
ranged? 

So that the dressing can be observed without waking 

the patient. 

Q. When must this be especially watched closely? 
During the first twenty-four hours. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 207 

Q. For what reason? 

There may be a secondary hemorrhage. 
Q. With what must the patient's strength be kept up? 

With nourishing food in liquid form. 
Q. How long must the liquid nourishment be kept up? 

Until the doctor permits solid food. 
Q. What occurs frequently after an operation or injury? 

A shock. 
Q. What is a shock ? 

A complete prostration of the nervous system, 
Q. What are the symptoms of a shock? 

The patient becomes faint, and pale or trembling, the 
mind confused. 

Q. With what is the surface covered? 

With perspiration. 
Q. By what other symptoms is a shock often accom- 
panied? 

By nausea and involuntary discharges. 
Q. How may a shock easily result? 

Fatally. 
Q. What will favor a shock? 

Loss of blood or physical debility. 
Q. What may be given to the patient? 

Brandy and beef tea. 
Q. How should it be given if the patient cannot swallow? 

By enema. 
Q. What should be applied to the extremities? 

Heat, but with all precautions mentioned above. 
Q. What is especially valuable in such cases? 

Hypodermic medication. 
Q. What will prove a powerful stimulant? 

A hot water bag over the heart, but great precaution 
must be used. 

Q. What is the patient never allowed to do? 

To make any effort to get up or exert himself. 



208 THE NURSING SISTER 

Q. What is the third great danger to which the patient 
is liable after a surgical operation? 

Blood poisoning (pyaemia). 
Q. What is the most contagious form of pyaemia? 

Erysipelas. 

Q. What must be done if any patient develops symptoms 

of it? 

He must be promptly insulated. 

Q. In what wounds is it most frequent? 

In lacerated wounds and in those of the head and 
hands. 

Q. How do the edges become? 

Red and swollen. 
Q. How is the temperature and pulse? 

The temperature is high, the pulse quick. 
Q. By what other symptoms is it accompanied? 

By headache, nausea and coated tongue. 
Q. In how many days may the disease terminate favor- 



ably: 



In ten to fourteen days, but it is often fatal. 
Q. By what is pyaemia usually initiated? 

With a chill, accompanied by high temperature. 
Q. By what is this temperature followed? 

By profuse perspiration. 

Q. How is the pulse, and how is the expression of the 

face? 

The pulse is fast and feeble, the expression of the face 

anxious. 

Q. Where are abscesses liable to form? 

In parts of the body distant from the wound, espe- 
cially in the joints. 

Q. At what intervals may the chill recur? 

From eight to twenty-four hours. 
Q. In how many days is this disease usually fatal? 
From four to twelve days. 

Q. What must by all means be maintained? 
The strength of the patient. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 209 

Q. What is of the utmost importance'? 

Free ventilation and utmost cleanliness. 
Q. What is a rather less dangerous form of blood poison- 
ing than the former? 

Scepticaema. 
Q. Does it occur with repeated chills? 

No. 
Q. By what is it characterized? 

By a high but more regular fever and a general typhoid 
condition. 

Q. What is usually a fatal complication with wounds? 

Tetanus. 

Q. What wounds does it generally follow? 

Slight wounds of palm of hand or Angers and sole of 
foot. 

Q. From what does it often result? 
• From exposure of wound to cold. 
Q. By what is it marked? 

By a certain muscular rigidity. 
Q. How does this rigidity set in? 

Very abruptly. 
Q. What muscles are first affected? 

The muscles of the throat and jaw. 
Q. How and how long does it extend? 

It extends gradually until the whole body is in con- 
tinuous convulsions. 

Q. What is important in these cases? 

That the symptoms be recognized early and reported 
to the doctor. 



—14 



210 THE NURSING SISTER. 



NINTH CHAPTER. 



Laparotomy. 

Q. How long should a patient, who is to be operated on 
for laparotomy or abdominal section, be at the hospital before 
the operation? 

At least three or four days. 

Q. How must the patient be prepared for the operation? 

The evening or the day preceding the operation the 

patient is given a special bath, the abdomen is shaved and a 

soap poultice applied, which is kept in place with a roller 

bandage. 

Q. What is sometimes preferred to the soap poultice'? 

A bichloride dressing. 
Q. How long is this left on? 

All night. 
Q. What is done in the morning? 

A thorough enema is given and a specimen of urine 
saved for examination. 

Q. What is then removed? 

If a soap pGultice has been applied, that is removed, 
the abdomen is then first thoroughly scrubbed and washed 
with alcohol. 

Q. What is then applied? 

A towel or piece of gauze soaked in 1-1000 bichloride 
solution and wrung out fairly dry is now laid on the abdomen 
and secured with a bandage. 
Q. When is this removed? 

Not until the last moment before the operation. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 211 

Q. Wbat is laid on the abdomen when the bichloride 
dressing is removed? 

Four sterilized towels, one on each side, one at the top 
and one at the bottom, leaving a space in the center for the 
incision. 

Q. How are the corners fastened together? 

With sterilized safety pins. 
Q. What is placed over the center until the surgeon is 
ready to make the incision? 

A piece of bichloride gauze. 
Q. At what temperature should the operating room be 
for a laparotomy? 

Eighty degrees. 
Q. In what condition should the Sister enter the opera- 
ting room? 

. With surgically clean hands, apron and veil. 
Q. When the doctor is ready what will be the duty of the 

Sister? 

To wait on the doctor, to keep out of the way and to 

see that nothing is handed to the doctor which has touched 

any doubtful surface. 

Q. What must the Sister do if she rests her hands on the 

table or touches anything that is not sterilized? 

She must wash her hands again and merely dip them 

in an antiseptic solution. 

Q. What must be done if anything should chance to fall 

on the floor during the operation? 

It must be laid aside and on no account be used again 

during the operation. 

Q. When the operation is going on what should a Sister 

always remember? 

That she is present as an assistant, not as a spectator. 

Q. What must she therefore look out for? 

To see what is wanted next and not exactly what the 

surgeon is doing. 

Q. What must be done after the operation is completed? 



212 THE NURSING SISTER. 



The dressings are to be applied. 
Q. How must these dressings be? 

Aseptic beyond suspicion. 
Q. What is done after the dressings are applied? 

The patient is put to bed. 
Q. What must now be ready for the patient? 

Hot water bottles well protected and stimulants. 
Q. Why is generally the shock in laparotomy so great? 

On account of the number of nerve-centers involved. 

Q. When may the pillow be placed under the patient's 

head? 

Not until the effects of the anaesthetic have passed off. 

Q. How should the abdomen be supported if there is any 

vomiting? 

It should be supported by a hand on each side of the 
wound. 

Q. What will this avoid? 

This will avoid any strain upon the sutures. 
Q. What is very important to distinguish in this case? 
The ether-vomiting after laparotomy from the vomit- 
ing of early developing of peritonitis. 

Q. How does the vomiting occur if caused by ether? 
Everything is rejected as soon as swallowed, and it 
stops only when the stomach is empty. 

Q. How may it be in acute peritonitis? 

The patient may take nourishment for hours and then 
suddenly throw up a lar?e quantity of greenish or yellowish 
fluid, having a sour smell. 

Q. In what time does peritonitis usually develop? 

In twelve to forty-eight hours after the operation. 
Q. What will frequently control the ether-vomiting if it 
is persistent? 

The application of ice-cold cloths to the throat. 
Q. Should the patient be allowed to overload her stom 
ach with ice water? 

Xo, water must be withheld as much as possible. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 213 

Q. What will allay the thirst better than ice water 

Very hot water 

Q. Of what other advantage is hot water in this case? 

It will not leave the mouth so parched as ice water 

nor is there any danger that the patient will desire to drink 

too much of it. 

Q. What is very necessary during the first twenty-four 

hours? 

To watch for any symptoms of hemorrhage. 

Q. What should the nurse do if she suspects a hemor- 
rhage? 

She should remove the pillow, elevate the foot end of 
the bed slightly, apply hot water bottles to the extremities, 
and notify the surgeon at once. 

Q. How often should the urine be drawn? 

When it becomes necessary. 
Q. What must be done with the urine? 

It must be measured, carefully observed and a speci- 
men saved for examination. 

Q. What is important to note about the bowels? 

Whether the bowels have moved or not, and the char- 
acter of the defecations. 

Q. Is it important that the clinical record be kept full 
and acurate in these cases? 
Yes. 
Q. How often should the temperature, pulse and respira- 
tions be taken and marked? 

Every four hours, the first few days. 
Q. What nourishment should be given? 

Always in liquid form, as is ordered by the surgeon. 
Q. What nourishment and medication may be necessary? 

Rectal, which should be administered with the great- 
est care. 

Q. How may tympanites be relieved? 



214 THE NURSING SISTER. 

By the introduction of a tube into the rectum through 
which the gas may escape. 

Q. How must the patient be turned on her side after 
permission is given by the doctor to do it? 

The whole body is turned at once so gently that no 
strain or twist will come upon the wound. 

Q. What must be observed when the time has come for 
the stitches to be removed? 

The same antiseptic precautions as when they were 
put in. 

Q. If the patient is not taken out of bed, with what 
should the bed be protected? 

With a rubber sheet or Kelly cushion. 
Q. What must be spread over these? 

Towels wrung out in bichloride 1-1000. 

Utiles for Sisters in the Surgical Ward and Opera- 

ing Room. 

1. Sisters should wear clean cotton or linen over- 
dress with sleeves, at the time of operation and when the sur- 
geon is making his rounds. 

2. Sisters having charge of surgical cases, should 
have the fingernails carefully trimmed down to the quick, and 
they should use the nailbrush with soap for five minutes be- 
fore each operation. They should not do any work which 
would cause the hands to chap: first, because the dirt gets into 
chapped places and. cannot be easily removed; secondly, they 
might get poison in the chaps and blood-poison would be the 
consequence. 

3. After the hands are washed, they should not be 
used about the eyes, nose or mouth, or put into the pockets. 

4. During the operation the hands should touch 
nothing that has not been sterilized. 

5. A Sister who handles the body of a patient, or 
gives the anaesthetic, or who carries water or removes slops, 
should not touch the instruments or dressings. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 215 

6. Instruments which have dropped on the floor or 
elsewhere, should not be used during the same operation 

again. 

7. Bandages, instruments and dressings of all kinds 

should be sterilized before every operation. Pans and dishes 
and instruments should be scrubbed with sapolio after each 
operation and steamed. 

8. All patients for abdominal operations should have 
a thorough warm bath the evening before. 

9. One Sister only should handle the instruments, 
gauze and thread, and she should do nothing else during the 
operation. 

10. The ordinary scissors should not be used for cut- 
ting gauze and thread ; only scissors which have been pre- 
pared for it should be used. 

11. Solution for use in the steamer or sterilizer: 
Carbonate of soda, one-half drachm to one quart of water. 



216 THE NURSING SISTER. 



TENTH CHAPTER. 



Gynecological Cases. 

Q. How are disorders of the female reproductive organ- 
ism classified? 

As gynecological. 
Q. What is the first important thing for a nurse to under- 
stand in case a patient is to be examined? 

The method of physical examination of the pelvic 
organs, and what assistance the physician may require of her. 
Q. What will be required of the nurse for a mere digital 
examination? 

Very little besides her presence and to wait upon the 
doctor as he may desire. 

Q. What is the Sister never allowed to do at such an ex- 
amination? 

To leave the patient alone with the doctor. 
Q. How should a patient be prepared for the examina- 
tion? 

If possible, she should have a bath, a vaginal douche 

and the external parts must be clean. 

Q. In what position may a patient be placed for an in- 
strumental examination? 

Either in a dorsal, knee-chest or lateral position. 
Q. How must the patient lie in a dorsal position? 

Flat on her back, with the knees elevated. 
Q. How in the knee-chest position? 

Just the reverse, the hips elevated. 
Q. On what does the weight then rest? 

On the knees. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 217 

Q. What should lie flat against the table? 

The chest, and should be supported by the elbows. 

Q. What is the third and most common position? 

The Sims position. 

Q. On what side is the patient placed in this position? 

On the left side, with the left buttock on the extreme 

left corner of the table, the left arm behind her, and the 

knees drawn up, the right above the left. 

Q. Where do the head and right arm of the patient 

come? 

To the right side of the table. 

Q. From what must the patient be protected? 

From unnecessary exposure. 

• Q. How should the limbs be protected? 

A light blanket or sheet should be placed lengthwise, 

so that each leg is covered separately. 

Q. What should a Sister do if she places the patient in a 

dorsal position? 

She must raise the patient's knees herself. 

Q. What will she avoid by this? 

Any strain on the part of the patient. 

Q. Should the patient ever be allowed to rise from her 

position without first turning to the side? 

Never, because the strain is too great. 

Q. How is the speculum prepared for use? 

By first dipping it for an instant into hot water to 

warm it, then oiling the outer surface. 

Q. If the Sims speculum is used, who must hold it in its 

place? 

The Sister, if required. 

Q. Where must she stand? 

Behind the patient, facing the operator. 
Q. How should she stand? 

Firm on both feet, in a position that she can main- 
tain steadily for a long time if necessary. 



218 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. Where may she rest her right arm? « 

On the right hip to steady it. 
Q. What hand retains the speculum? 

The right hand. 
Q. In what position must it be held? 

In the same position in which it is handed. 
Q. What other instruments are needed for these cases? 
Depressor, sound, probe, tenaculum, curette, uterine 
dressing, forceps, applicator, cotton holders, dilators and pes- 
saries. 

Q. What are more commonly employed in the treatment 
of uterine cases? 

Various tampons and other local dressings. 
Q. How is the ordinary tampon made? 

By cutting a strip of absorbent cotton about three 
inches wide and rolling it up, not too tightly, until it has a 
diameter of about an inch and a half. 

Q. Where is the twine or soft thread tied? 

About the middle of the roll, leaving ends of about 
six inches hanging. 

Q. For what are these ends left? 

For convenience in removal. 
Q. For what purpose are they used? 

They are used to keep the parts in proper position and 
to apply medication. 

Q. How is the butterfly tampon made? 

Take a thin, flat piece of cotton with a string tied 
about the middle. 

Q. How is a kitetail tampon made? 

It is a series of bunches of cotton tied at intervals of 
two or three inches along one string. 

Q. By what other means is vaginal medication applied? 

By means of suppositories and douches. 
Q. What is used for a douche? 

Either medicated or pure water, as directed. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 219 

Q. At what temperature are hot douches usually ordered? 

At a temperature of 112 to 118 Fahr. 
Q. How are they given? 

They are usually given as prolonged douches, from 
two to four quarts being used. 

Q. How should the patient lie? 

The patient should lay on her back, with her hips ele- 
vated until they are several inches higher than the shoulders. 
Q. Why is it absolutely necessary to have the patient in 
this position? 

Because a douche taken standing or sitting is of very 
little use. 

Q. What is put under the patient? 

A douche pan. 
Q. What syringe is used? 

• A fountain syringe, as it has a steady flow under low 
pressure. 

Q. How should it be held or hung? 

At a sufficient height to give considerable force to 
the flow. 

Q. What kind of a nozzle should be used? 

A long nozzle which has three or four openings, and 
it must be introduced well before the water is injected. 

Q. What care must be taken when giving a hot douche? 
That the mucous membrane is not blistered by the 
hot tube. 

Q. What tubes are preferable to metal ones? 

Ivory, hard rubber or glass. 
Q. What tubes and nozzles are mostly used? 

Glass tubes, because they can be made and kept per- 
fectly aseptic. 

Q. How can this be done? 

By first boiling them and keeping them in an anti- 
septic solution or a piece of sterilized gauze. 

Q. Which are the most common gynaecological opera- 
tions? 



220 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Those for laceration of the cervix and perinseuni. 
Q. What must be carefully noted and reported in the 
preparation of the patient? 

The previous condition of the bowels and the char- 
acter of any vaginal discharge. 

Q. How should the patient be prepared? 

The patient should have a full bath the day before 
and, if necessary, the parts shaved. 

Q. May the Sister shave the parts? 

No; this should be done by the doctor or whoever 
may be appointed by him. 

Q. What should be given in the evening? 

A purgative, and in the morning an enema, if possi- 
ble six hours before the operation, so the rectum may become 
empty and quiet. 

Q. What besides this must be given in the morning? 

An antiseptic douche. 
Q. About what should the nurse obtain definite direc- 
tions from the surgeon after an operation of the cervix? 
About emptying the bladder. 
Q. What should be done after an operation of the 
perinaeum? 

Tie the patient's knees together, that no unconscious 
movement on her part may bring a strain upon the stitches. 
Q. What might be the consequence if there be much 
strain upon the stitches? 

The desirable result will be hindered, even if the 
stitches are not torn out. 

Q. Of what does the treatment consist? 

Of rest and keeping up absolute cleanliness? 
Q. What may a little careless manipulation on the 
part of the nurse do? 

It may render useless the best skill of the operator. 
Q. What must be done if the patient is allowed to pass 
urine voluntarily? 

The sutured parts must be gently irrigated each time. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 221 

Q. What care must be taken if the patient is catherized? 

That no drops of urine fall upon the wound. 
Q. How can this be avoided? 

By placing a piece of absorbent cotton between it and 
the catheter. 

Q. What must the nurse do after and during defecation? 

See that there is no strain upon the sutures. 

Q. What must be exercised in all manipulation in such 

cases? 

The utmost gentleness. 

Q. How long must the most scrupulous cleanliness be 

kept up? 

Until the stitches are removed, which is about the 

ninth day. 



222 THE NURSING SISTER. 



ELEVENTH CHAPTER. 



Fractures and Other Accidents. 

Q. What are the most common injuries of bones? 

Fractures. 
Q. What is a simple fracture? 

It is a fracture in which the bone is only divided. 
Q. What is the fracture called if there is a wound of the 
soft parts so that ttie broken bone communicates with the 
outer air? 

A compound fracture. 
Q. Does every flesh wound, existing together with a frac- 
ture, render it a compound fracture? 

No; only when it leads to the seat of the fracture. 
Q. What is it called if the bone is broken in two or more 

places? 

A multiple fracture. 

Q. What is it called if some joint or cavity is involved 
in the injury? 

A complicated fracture. 
Q. What is it called when one end of the broken bone is 
driven forcibly into the other? 
An impacted fracture. 
Q. When is a fracture serious? 

When there is a great injury of the tissues, or when a 
joint is involved. 

Q. What are signs of fracture? 

Pain, distortion, loss of function or unnatural move- 
ment or crepitus. 

Q. What is crepitus? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 223 



It is the grating made by rubbing together the ends 
of the broken bone. 

Q. By what is a fracture of the spine indicated? 

By loss of sensation and power of motion below the 
point of injury. 

Q. What will a patient complain of with a fractured rib? 
Of sharp pain when he takes a deep breath or coughs, 
and will often spit blood. 

Q. What is the danger from a fractured rib? 

It is of injury to the heart, lungs or large blood- 
vessels. 

Q. In what does the treatment of fracture consist? 

In putting the fragments into proper position by the 
doctor and keeping them there until they have united. 
Q. What may be used for this purpose? 

Splints made of wood, tin, paste-board, leather, felt 
or anything that will hold the bone accurately and firmly in 
place. 

Q. What must be done with the splint before it is ap- 
plied? 

It must be well padded. 

Q. What are frequently used in place of splints? 

Bandages, saturated with glue, starch or plaster of 
paris. 

Q. What is usually preferred for a compound fracture? 

A fracture box. 
Q. How should this be prepared? 

It must be padded well. 
Q. What will then answer the purpose of the splints? 

The sides of the box to which the limb is bandaged. 
Q. What must be done with the limb before any appa- 
ratus is applied? 

It must be carefully washed and dried. 
Q. What must be dusted over it to absorb perspiration? 

Fine starch or toilet powder. 
Q. What is frequently applied in fractures of the thigh? 

An extension weight. 



224 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. Where is this attached? 

It is attached to the foot with adhesive straps. 
Q. How should a broken limb be lifted? 

The parts both above and below the point of fracture 
must be lifted evenly and at the same time. 
Q. What care must be taken? 

Neither to shorten nor to twist the limb. 

Q. What may be the consequence of unskillful handling? 

A single fracture may be converted in a compound 
one. 

Q. What is dislocation? 

It is the displacement of one of the bony structures of 

a joint from the other. 

Q. What is a sprain. 

It is the laceration or stretching of the ligaments 

with twisting of the joint. 

Q. What should be done if in case of fracture of the limb 

it cannot be set at once? 

Temporary splints, made of paste-board, shingles, 

etc., may be applied until the surgeon arrives. 

Q. How can it be bandaged, if no splint is at hand? 

To a straight padded stick or even to the other leg. 

Q. What should be applied in fracture of the knee-cap 

bone? 

The foot should be elevated to a considerable height, 

and the leg kept straight by a long splint at the back. 

Q. What should be put under the knee? 

A pad. 

Q. What should be applied for fractured ribs? 

Keep the patient quiet in bed, put a broad bandage 

tightly around the chest. 

Q. What should be noted particularly. 

Whether there is any blood raised. 

Q. How should the patient be kept, if skull-fracture is 

suspected? 

In a quiet, dark room, on his back, with head slightly 

raised and cold cloths applied to the head. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 225 

Q. What should be done for fracture of the jaw? 

The mouth should be closed, and fixed in place with 

a bandage. 

Q. Where do sprains frequently occur? 

At the wrist and ankle. 

Q. How can they be treated? 

They may be soaked in hot water and bandaged with 

hot cloths. 

Q. What may be used on a painfully crushed finger or 

toe? 

It may be wrapped in soft cloths wet with hot water 

and a little laudanum. 

Q. About what must special care be taken with contused 

and lacerated wounds? 

The cleaning out of blood-clots. 

Q. In what cases is rest especially important? 

With all extensive wounds, especially those of the 

thoric and abdominal cavities. 

Q. How should the patient be laid, when the chest is 

injured? 

Lay the patient rather on the wounded side than on 

the other. 

Q. What is important with a punctured wound? 

To keep it open until it heals from the bottom. 

Q. What should be done if this puncture be made by 

splinter or thorn? 

The splinter must be entirely removed, not by poking 

at it, but by making a sharp incision along its course. 

Q. What should be done if the splinter goes under the 

finger nail? 

Trim or split the nail down to the end of the splinter. 

Q. What should be done in case of the bite of a venomous 

snake or other probably poisoned wound? 

The bleeding should be rather . encouraged than 

checked. 

—15 



226 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. How can this be done? 

The limb should be tied tight if possible, above the 
point of injury at once, the wound should be sucked or cup- 
ping-glasses applied. 

Q. What else may be applied? 

Ammonia water. 
Q. What may be done if possible? 
The wound may be cauterized. 
Q. What may always be regarded as suspicious? 

The bite of any animal. 
Q. What bite is said to be more dangerous than that of 
a dog? 

The bite of a rat or cat. 
Q. How should stings of insects be treated? 

With cool lotions of ammonia. 
Q. With what may the eruption caused by poisoning be 
treated? 

With a saturated solution of carbonate of soda. 
Q. What are generally the most alarming accidents that 
will happen from time to time? 
Those caused by fire. 
Q. What should be done if your own clothes catch Are? 

Lie down and roll and keep your mouth closed. 
Q. What should be done, if you see another person in the 
same danger? 

Throw the person down, and wrap a shawl, rug or any 
heavy woolen thing at hand, to extinguish the flames. 
Q. Where should you begin to wrap? 

At the head keeping the flames as much as possible 
from the face. 

Q. What is always the great danger in case of fire acci- 
dent? 

That of inhaling the flames. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 227 

Q. What is the first object of treatment of burns and 

scalds? 

To exclude the air. 

Q. What will this at once allay? 

The pain. 
Q. What can be done if the injury is only on the surface? 
Sprinkle it thickly with carbonate of soda and tie a 
wet bandage over it until the pain subsides. 

Q. How may the part then be protected from the action 
of the air? 

By painting it over with the white of an egg. 
Q. What is even a better application? 

Flexible collodion. 
Q. What other plan can be used for relief? 

Dust the surface with flour and cover with a thick 
layer of cotton wool? 

Q. If the burn is severe enough to have blistered or 
destroyed the outer skin (cuticle) what is generally used? 
Carron oil, equal parts of linseed oil and lime water. 
Q. What is even better? 

Pure olive oil or vaseline. 
Q. By what is a severe burn usually accompanied? 

By a shock. • 

Q. How are burns produced by strong acids treated? 

The same as those by fire. 
Q. What may make a severe burn? 

Lime or caustic. 
Q. How may these be treated? 

With a solution of diluted vinegar or lemon juice 
about a teaspoonful to a cup of water. 

Q. What should be done if fragments of lime get into 
the eye? 

Bathe it with a solution of vinegar or lemon without 
wasting time in trying to pick it out. 

Q. How may dust or cinders be cleared out of the eye? 
By drawing the upper lid well down over the lower 
one and at the same time blowing the nose forcibly. 



228 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. What can be done if a particle gets caught in the 
lower lid? 

Draw down the lower lid by the lashes, direct the 
patient to turn the eye-ball toward the nose. 

Q. With what can any foreign body be wiped out of the 

eye? 

With a soft handkerchief. 

Q. What can be done if it is under the upper lid? 

This can be turned up over a knitting needle or a 

small pencil and then be wiped out. 

Q. In what direction should the eyes always be rubbed? 

Always towards the nose. 

Q. What should be done if an insect gets into the ear? 

The sufferer should be laid on the other side, the tube 

of the ear be straightened by pulling the tip upward and 

slightly backward. 

Q. With what should the ear then be filled? 

With olive oil or glycerine, then the insect will float 

on the surface. 

Q. What should be done if there be a hard substance in 

the ear? 

Hold the ear downward and syringe gently with warm 
water. , 

Q. What special care must be taken in this case? 

Not to close the opening of the ear with the syringe. 

Q. In what cases should this never be done? 

If it is anything that will swell by moisture, as a bean 
or pea. 

Q. Is it advisable to poke at such substances? 

Never, for it may be driven beyond reach. 
Q. Who should be sent for? 

The doctor as soon as possible. 
Q. What should be done if there is a foreign body in the 
nostril? 

Make the patient take a full breath, then close the 
mouth and other nostril firmly. When the air, having no 
other way to escape, may expel the obstruction. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 229 



Q. What should be done, if this fails and the object is in 

sight? 

Compress the nostril above it to prevent its being 

pushed up farther, and hook it out with a hairpin or bent wire. 
Q. What should be done if anything is stuck in the 
throat or oesophagus? 

It can be hooked out the same way if it is too far 
down to be reached with the finger. 

Q. In what case is it advisable to push the object down? 

Only in case it were digestible substance. 
Q. What may be taken to carry the obstruction down? 

A piece of bread may be swallowed. 
Q. By what is a foreign body generally expelled out of 
the windpipe? 

By coughing. 
Q. What part is very sensitive? 

The trachea. 
Q. What will sometimes be of use if the person is chok- 
ing? 

A blow on the back. 

Q. What can be done if it is a child? 

It can be taken up by the feet and head held down, 
while several blows can be given between the shoulders. 

Q. What may be done if a person is apparently drowned? 
Before beginning artificial respiration, turn the face 
down for a moment and clean out with the finger the mucus 
that may be at the base of the tongue. 

Q. In what other cases must this be done? 

In cases of strangulation. 
Q. What must be removed from the neck? 

Everything tight. 
Q. From where must a patient suffering from the effects 
of a severe cold be kept? 

From the heat, otherwise there is danger of sloughing 
of the frost-bitten parts. 

Q. Where should a person be taken who is found frozen? 



230 TIIE NURSING SISTER. 

He should be taken to a cold room, undressed, rubbed 

with snow or wrapped in cloths wrung out in ice-water. 

Q. How long should the friction be continued about the 

extremities? 

Until circulation seems restored. 

Q. What may be resorted to if the natural respiration is 

at a standstill? 

Artificial respiration. 

Q. What should be given as soon as the patient is able 

to swallow? 

Brandy or beeftea. 

Q. How should he be brought into the warmer air? 

Only by degrees. 

Q. In what case is the same plan pursued? 

With any frost-bitten parts. 

Q. What should be the aim? 

To restore vitality without inducing sloughing. 

Q. Will a person always feel it, if parts of the body are 

frozen? 

Parts of the body may be frozen without the sufferer's 

knowledge, as numbness precedes the latter stages of freezing. 
Q. What should not be done with a tendency to chil- 
blains? 

Cold feet should not be too quickly heated. 

Q. How should the feet be kept? 

Always warm and loosely clad. 
Q. What will relieve the itching? 

Painting them with iodine will relieve the itching. 
Q. What may develop if neglected? 

Painful and intractable ulcers. 
Q. Where does a hernia of the peritoneum, with pros- 
tration of the abdominal contents take place? 

Either in the groin or lower part of the abdomen. 
Q. What does the tumor often contain? 

A loop of small intestines. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 231 

Q. What are the symptoms? 

Intense pain, obstinate constipation and persistent 
vomiting. 

Q. What should be done in such cases? 

Put an ice-bag over the swelling, give no food, no 
physic, very little drink and send for the surgeon at once. 

Q. What should be done in cases where a patient is 
found insensible? 

The head should be kept cool and get medical advice 
as soon as possible. 

Q. What should be done if poison is taken into the 
stomach? 

The stomach is to be evacuated by emetics. 
Q. What makes an excellent emetic? 

Warm water and salt, or ground mustard, a table- 
spoonful mixed in a cup of a warm water and given repeatedly 
Q. How should emetics be given? 

Half a pint to a pint at the time. 
Q. What should be given after some irritant poison? 

Some bland fluid to soothe the irritated parts 
Q. What may be given? 

The white of an egg, milk, flour and water, gruel, 
olive or castor oil. 



232 THE NURSING SISTER 



TWELFTH CHAPTER. 



Hemorrhage. 

Q. What is a hemorrhage? 

The escape of blood from its containing vessels. 
Q. How may it be described? 

As arterial, venous or capillary hemorrhage. 
Q. Of what color is the blood from an artery? 

Bright red. 
Q. How will it spurt out? 

In jets of considerable force from the side of the 
wound nearest the heart. 

Q. Of what color is venous blood? 

It is of a dark purplish hue. 
Q. How does it move? 

In a sluggish, continuous flow, mainly on the side 
farthest from the heart. 

Q. What is a capillary hemorrhage? 

A mere oozing of blood. 
Q. Which of the three is the most dangerous? 

The arterial hemorrhage. 
Q. If a hemorrhage is not checked promptly, how may it 
terminate in many cases? 
Fatally. 
Q. What is a hemorrhage, following short after an oper- 
ation, named? 

A secondary hemorrhage. 
Q. How long is there any danger of a hemorrhage after 
an operation? 

The first twenty-four hours, but it is by no means over 
until the wound is well healed. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 233 

Q. What favors the formation of clots and the arterial 

contraction? 

The application of heat or cold. 

Q. What will reduce the force with which the blood is 

sent to the artery? 

Elevating the injured part. 

Q. What must be done if blood is spurting from an 

artery? 

Pressure must be applied. 

Q. How can this be done? 

With the finger, by pressing upon the bleeding point 
or the vessels which supply it. 

Q. What may be done if the bleeding vessel is too deep 
to be reached by the finger? 

The wound can be plugged with gauze. 
Q. How can this be done most effectively? 

Cut a number of small bits, each a little larger, begin- 
ning with the smallest, press them well into the wound. 
Q. How far should the pile extend? 

To some height about the surrounding level. 
Q. By what may it be secured? 

By a tight bandage. 
Q. Where can such compression be made successfully? 

Only over a bony surface. 
Q. In what cases does it become difficult and sometimes 
even impossible to control the hemorrhage? 

If the artery is imbedded in the muscles. 
Q. How are wounds of the head and face apt to bleed? 

Profusely. 
Q. How can this bleeding be almost always controlled? 
By direct pressure, as the skull affords firm counter- 
pressure. 

Q. What may be applied, in case the pressure of the finger 
cannot be made forcible enough, or if the pressure cannot be 
kept up long? 

A tourniquet. 



234 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What should be done with the limb before the tour- 
niquet is applied? 

It should be elevated as high as possible. 
Q. What may be used in the absence of the regular 
apparatus? 

A handkerchief or a piece of muslin with a hard knot 
or smooth stone tied in the middle. 

Q. How should this be fastened around the limb? 

Rather loose and twisted with a stick. 
Q. Where must the knot be kept? 

Over the injured artery until pressure enough is made 
to completely occlude it. 

Q. How long may a tourniquet remain on the arm?. 

One hour. 
Q. How long on the thigh? 
For two hours, no longer. 
Q. For what reason? 

As the part will die if its nutrition is cut off too long. 
Q. What may be used if the artery cannot be reached with 
a tourniquet? 

The handle of a long key or a blunt stick, suitably 
covered, may be forcibly pressed against it. 

Q. What is often used to prevent hemorrhage during an 
operation upon the limb? 

A very tight rubber bandage applied spirally from its 
extremity to a point above the site of the proposed incision. 
Q. What should be around the place where this stops? 
A piece of rubber tubing with hooks at the end for 
fastening. 

Q. What is to be removed when the circulation will be 
found almost completely cut off? 
The rubber bandage. 
Q. What should be kept on hand where there is danger 
of secondary hemorrhage? 

A piece of heavy rubber tubing, which may be used in 
place of a tourniquet. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 235 

Q. What will sometimes aid in arresting a hemorrhage? 

Flexion of a limb. 
Q. How is this done? 

Put in the joint a firm roll of lint, against which pres- 
sure will come when the joint is bent. 

Q. What may the patient be directed to do in case of 
bleeding from the palm of the hand? 
To clasp closely a wad of lint. 
Q. How should he hold the hand at the same time? 

High above the head. 
Q. What other means are there for arresting a hemor- 
rhage? 

Application of medicines externally, such as per- 

chloride of iron, alum, gallic acid. 

Q. With what is obstinate bleeding from a small point 
sometimes checked? 

By touching it with caustic. 
Q. What may be employed by the surgeon when the 
bleeding is from many vessels over a large surface? 
A cautery. 
Q. What is a cautery? 

The application of a hot iron. 
Q. When is the cautery or external medicine used? 

Only then when no other means will answer. 
Q. What method is most commonly used to arrest hemor- 
rhage of the artery? 
Ligation. 
Q. How is this done? 

The artery is picked up with a pair of forceps and a 
ligature tied firmly around it. 

Q. What ligatures were formerly used for this purpose? 

Ligatures of strong, soft silk. 
Q. What ligatures are employed now on wounds which 
are to be completely closed? 

Silk or cat-gut ligatures, because they absorb and do 
not need to be removed. 



236 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. Which is the most dangerous form of venous hemor- 
rhage? 

That from rupture of a varicose vein. 

Q. Where should pressure, heat or cold be applied in such 

a case? 

Below the bleeding point, the limb being elevated. 

Q. Why is pressure made below the point of bleeding? 

Because above the point it would be useless and 
absurd. 

Q. Why is ligation avoided? 

Because it is likely to cause inflammation of the vein. 
Q. What should be worn in cases where there is danger 
of such a rupture? 

An elastic stocking or bandage. 
Q. When should this be put on? 

Before getting up in the morning. 

Q. Is cappilary hemorrhage dangerous? 

No, it can easily be checked by cold, by position or by 
hot water. 

Q. How must the hot water be used? 

As hot as it can be borne. 
Q. Why will warm water not do? 

Because it will increase the flow of blood. 

Q. How does the blood come up if it comes from the 

lung? 

It is coughed up, is bright red and more or less 
frothy. 

Q. From where does blood, supposed to come from the 

lungs, frequently ccme? 

From the mouth or throat. 
Q. What is the vomiting of blood called? 

Hasmatemesis. 
Q. What is the patient likely to have before it occurs? 

A sense of fullness and oppression. 
Q. How does the blood come up? 

A large quantity of dark blood, mixed with food, is 
thrown up without much nausea. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 237 

Q. How should the patient be kept in both cases? 

Quiet and cool, the head elevated. 
Q. What may be given to the patient? 

Bits of ice, which should be swallowed whole, if pos- 
sible. 

Q. What may be applied externally? 

Ice cold cloths. 
Q. What kind of food may be given? 

Only fluid food, cold, in small quantities. 
Q. What may be done when an exhausting hemorrhage 
has occurred, after its source has been controlled? 

The limbs may be tightly bandaged from their ex- 
tremities to the trunk. 
Q. For what purpose? 

To prevent the circulation of blood which is needed 
by the vital organs. 

Q. What care must be taken? 

Not to leave them on too long. 
Q. What often appears in the stool after the vomiting of 

blood? 

Some blood, as a dark, tarry substance. 

Q. What may be given for a hemorrhage from the bowels? 

Ice-cold injections or other medicated solutions as 
ordered. 

Q. What should be applied over the abdomen? 

Cold applications. 
Q. What is sometimes ordered internally? 

Small doses of opium. 
Q. In what cases may it occur? 

In the course of typhoid or yellow fever or dysentery. 
Q. What is most commonly the cause of a hemorrhage? 

Hemorrhoids. 
Q. How must the patient be kept in this case? 

Quiet and lying down. 
Q. From where does blood in the urine come? 

From the kidneys, bladder or urethra. 



238 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. What must be noted? 

Whether it appears at the beginning or at the end of 
the micturition, and whether the passage is accompanied 
by pain or not. 

Q. How is the blood from the kidneys? 

Dark and clotted. 
Q. How is it from the bladder? 

Generally clear. 
Q. What local treatment is generally ordered in cases of 
uterine hemorrhage, especially when following an operation? 

A vaginal douche of hot water; or hot solution of 
alum or ergot. 

Q. What is given internally? 

Fluid extract of ergot or gallic acid. 
Q. What other local hemorrhage needs special attention? 

Epistaxis (bleeding from the nose). 
Q. What is often the cause of it? 

An accident or a spontaneous outbreak. 
Q. If spontaneous, as what may it be looked upon? 

As an effort of nature to relieve the head. 
Q. But if this is too severe, how can it be checked? 

By pressing the facial artery at the root of the nose. 
Q. Where should cold applications be applied? 

To the forehead and back of the neck. 
Q. What position should never be taken? 

Leaning over a basin. 
Q. How should you make the patient stand? 

Erect, throw his head back and elevate his arms 
while you hold a cold, damp sponge to the nostrils. 
Q. What is done if the bleeding still persists? 

The nostrils are syringed with salt water, ice cold' 
one drachm to one pint, or with a solution of alum or iron. 
Q. What must the patient avoid? 

Blowing the nose. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 239 



Q. What is necessary if all other means fail? 

That the surgeon plug the nose. 
Q. Why is this process resorted to when all others have 
proved ineffectual? 

Because it is effectual, although very painful. 



240 THE NURSING SISTER. 



THIRTEENTH CHAPTER. 



Emergencies. 

Q. What above all things should a Sister show in case of 
accident? 

Coolness and presence of mind, no hurry, no confusion 
whatever. 

Q. What is often the consequence of any severe injury? 

A complete prostration of the vital powers. 
Q. What is this called? 

Shock. 
Q. How does the patient appear in this state? 

Sometimes conscious, the surface of the body pale and 
covered with cold perspiration. 
Q. What is the temperature? 

Abnormal. 
Q. How is the pulse? 

Feeble. 
Q. How are the nostrils? 

Dilated. 
Q. How are the eye-lids? 

Drooping. 
Q. What other symptoms may be observed? 

Mental and muscular weakness. 
Q. What may happen in less severe cases? 

Nausea and vomiting. 
Q. How should the head be kept? 

Low. 
Q. What should be given to the patient? 

Stimulants until the heart's action is revived. 
Q. To what parts should heat be applied? 

To the extremeties and the pit of the stomach. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 241 

Q. What is the best stimulant when there is nausea? 

Brandy. 
Q. What is to be done if the patient cannot swallow? 

Inject brandy or camphorated oil hypodermically. 
Q. In what conditions are the same signs manifested? 

In fainting or syncope. 
Q. By what is this unconsciousness in fainting occa- 
sioned? 

By insufficient supply of blood to the brain. 
Q. What must never be done with the head? 

It must never be raised, but be kept as low or even 
lower than the feet. 

Q. What is next important for the patient? 

Plenty of fresh air. 
Q. What may be given by inhalation? 

Ammonia, but not too strong. 



16 



242 THE NURSING SISTER. 



FOURTEENTH CHAPTER. 



1 



The Human Body. 



Q. How is the human body divided? 

Into head, trunk and limbs. 
Q. Of what does the head consist? 

Of the arched skull, which in the upper part, 
contains the brain and is covered with the scalp, and in the 
lower half the eyes. 

Q. What is on the front of the skull? 

The forehead. 
Q. What is below the forehead? 

Two cavities with the eyes. 

Q. What is between the eyes? 

The nose, with the nostrils adjusted to the nasal 
bone. 

Q. What is on both sides of the nose? 

The cheeks, which cover the upper jaw bone. 

Q. How far do the cheeks extend? 

They extend without interruption to the lower jaw 
bone. 

Q. What is in the middle of the face below the nose? 

The mouth, with upper and lower lip; lower clown is 

the chin. 

Q. What are situated on both sides of the head? 

The ear trumpets, which collect and carry the sounds 

to the internal ear. 

Q. Through what is the head united to the trunk? 

Through the neck. 

Q. What is found in the back of the neck? 

The spinal column. 

Q. What is situated in the front of the throat? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 243 

Commencing from the spinal column, past the gullet 

(oesophagus), farther or in front of the trachea or wind-pipe, 

with the larynx. 

Q. What does the larynx contain? 

The vocal cords. 

Q. What is found on both sides of the throat? 

Large veins, which lead and bring back blood from 

the brain, and also important nerves. 

Q. How many sides has the trunk of the human body? 

The front and the back. 

Q. What is situated in front of the shoulder-blade on 

both sides of the throat? 

The collar-bone (clavicle). 

Q. How far does it extend? 

From the upper corner of the breast-bone to the 

shoulder-blade. 

Q. What forms the upper part of the trunk? 

The thorax. 

Q. What is placed in the chest on both sides? 

The lungs. 

Q. What is situated on the left side near the middle 

line? 

The heart. 

Q. What is found at the lower end of the chest in the 

center? 

The pit of the stomach. 

Q. What is noticed on the back of the trunk at the top? 

Two flat, three-cornered bones, which almost meet in 
the center, the shoulder-blades (scapula). 
Q. What follows lower down? 

The ribs, attached to both sides of the spinal column. 
Q. Where are the upper limbs connected with the trunk? 

In the shoulder. 
Q. Of what do the upper limbs consist? 

The upper arm. the lower arm. hands and fingers. 



244 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. What is the space called between the chest and arm, 
there where the arm is joined to the shoulder? 

The arm-pit (axilla). 
Q. Of what do the lower limbs consist? 

Of the thigh, leg and foot. 
Q. Where are the lower limbs connected to the trunk? 

In the hip. 
Q. What are the bones? 

They are the frame-work of the body. 
Q. What do they constitute when joined, as in a living 



man? 



The skeleton. 



Bones of the Head. 

Q. How are the bones of the head divided? 

Into the bones of the head and bones of the face. 
Q. How many bones are in the head? 

Eight. 
Q. How are they joined together in a grown person? 
By close-fitting tight seams which present an appear- 
ance along their edges like the teeth of a saw. 

Q. What is inclosed in the cavity of the skull? 

The brain with its membranes. 
Q. Are the bones connected firmly in the skulls of child- 
ren? 

No; they are joined together by membraneous con- 
nections. 

Q. What is felt through the skin there, where two or 
three bones meet? 

Soft, impressible places, called fontanelles. 
Q. Where can one of them be distinctly felt? 

On the top of the head somewhat farther back than 
the forehead (the anterior fontanelle). 
Q. How long can this be felt? 

Frequently up to the second year. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 245 

Q. How many bones form the frame of the lower part of 
the head — the face? 
Fourteen. 
Q. Which is the most moveable bone in the face? 

The lower jaw bone which moves in two sockets just 
below the skull, located on inferior surface of skull. 
Q. What is found in the upper lower jaw bone? 

The teeth. 
Q. How many teeth has a grown person? 

Thirty-two in all — sixteen above and sixteen below. 

Bones of the Trunk. 

Q. How many bones form the trunk? 

Fifty-seven. 
Q. Of what do they consist? 

Of the spinal column or backbone, the thorax and 
basin or pelvis. 

Q. Of what does the spinal column consist? 

It is built out of single round bones which have pro- 
jections. 

Q. What are these single bones called? 

Vertebras. 
Q. What is found in the middle of these round bones 
built upon each other or vertebras? 

The spinal canal, and in them the spinal marrow or 
spinal cord. 

Q. Where is the spinal column joined to the head? 
At the base of the skull. 

Q. On what does the lower part of the spinal column 

rest? 

On the small of the back or sacrum. 

Q. How are these vertebra? divided? 

There are seven cervical vertebra?, twelve dorsal ver- 
tebra? and five lumbar verterbra?. 



246 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. What forms the thorax? 

The ribs and breastbone with the backbone. 
Q. How is it formed? 

The ribs — twelve on each side— are joined to the back- 
bone; they come around like an arch and are connected in 
front to the breastbone. 

Q. How many ribs are joined to the breastbone or 
sternum? 

The seven upper ones. 
Q. What are they called? 

The true ribs. 
Q. What are the lower ribs called? 

The short or false ribs. 
Q. What are the two lowest ribs called? 

The floating ribs. 
Q. What is the thorax? 

It is the second large cavity containing the lungs and 
heart. 

Q. What forms the basin or pelvis? 

The lower lumbar vertebrae, the small of the back or 

sacrum and the hip. 

Q. What is found on the outer side of the hip bone? 

A socket into which the head of the thigh bone fits. 

Q. What do the above mentioned bones form with their 

membraneous and soft parts? 

The third large cavity, which contains the stomach, 

the intestines, the liver, spleen, the kidneys, bladder and 

pancreas. 

Bones of the Upper Limbs. 

Q. What is situated on the upper end of the back? 

A flat, three-cornered bone, called shoulder-blade (or 
scapula). 

Q. What rests upon this bone? 

The collar-bone (clavicle). 
Q. To where does the collar-bone extend? 



THE NURSING SISTER. 247 

To the upper corner of the breast-bone (or sternum ). 
Q. What is situated at one corner of the shoulder-blade? 

A hollow with a smooth surface, into which the head 
of the upper arm-bone is placed. 

Q. What kind of a bone is the upper arm-bone, or so- 
called humerus? 

It is a long, strong, round bone. 
Q. What has it at its lower end? 

A kind of a roll, which is joined to the larger bone of 
the forearm, called ulna. 

Q. How many bones has the forearm? 

Two — one on the side of the thumb and the other on 
the side of the little finger. 

Q. How is the bone on the side of the thumb called? 

The radius 
■ Q. How the one on the side of the little finger? 

The ulna. 
Q. With what are the two bones joined movable to- 
gether? 

With ligaments. 
Q. To what are they joined at the lower end? 

To the wrist. 
Q. How is the hand divided? 

Into the wrist (or carpus), palm (metacarpus) and 
finger (or phalanges). 

Q. What forms the wrist? 

Eight short irregular bones. 
Q. How are they joined together? 

By ligaments, into a compact bunch. 
Q. What forms the palm of the hand? 

Five long tube-shaped bones (metacarpal bones). 
Q. How many bones has the fore- finger? 

Three (called phalanges). 
Q. How many the thumb? 

Two. 



248 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Bones of the Lower Limbs. 

Q. How is the lower limb divided? 

Thigh, leg, foot. 
Q. What is the part called between the knee and hip'? 

The thigh. 
Q. What is the part called from the knee to the foot? 

The leg. 
Q. How are the lower limbs joined to the trunk? 

By the head of the thigh-bone (femur), which fits into 
a socket of the hip-bone. 

Q. Which is the longest and strongest bone in the human 



body 



The thigh-bone (femur). 
Q. What is found at its lower end? 

A broad, round surface for the knee-joint. 

0. To what is the surface of the thigh-bone (or femur) 

joined? 

To the strongest bone of the leg, the shin (tibia). 

Q. What does this connection form? 

The knee-joint. 

Q. What is in front of the knee-joint? 

A small, three-cornered bone, with round edges, called 

the knee-pan, knee-cap (or patella). 

Q. With what is the knee-pan (or patella) joined to the 

thigh and leg? 

With the ligaments. 

Q. How many bones has - the leg? 

It has two, the shin-bone (or tibia) and the fibula. 

Q. What kind of a bone is the shin-bone (tibia)? 

It is strong, three-cornered, tube-shaped bone. 

Q. Where is it situated? 

At the innerside, on the side of the big toe, and is the 

principal bearer of the body while walking and standing. 

Q. What kind of a bone is the fibula? 

A long, slender bone on the outer side of the leg and 

much weaker than the shin-bone. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 249 



Q. Where is it joined to the shin-bone'? 

Above and below. 
Q. To what are both bones joined at the lower end? 

To the ankle-bone of the foot. 
Q. Of what does the foot consist? 

Of the tarsus or middle foot, or metatarsus, the toes 
or phalanges. 

Q. How many bones are in the tarsus? 

Seven irregular bones. 
Q. What do they form? 

The ankle, the heel and instep. 
Q. What do the middle foot or metatarsal bones form? 

The flat of the foot and part of the instep. 
Q. How many are in each foot? 

Five. 
■ Q. What are joined to these five bones? 

-Fourteen phalanges, forming the toes. 
Q. How is the foot shaped? 
It is arched and elastic. 
Q. Where does the weight rest? 
On the heel and ball of the toes. 

Skin. 

Q. With what is the human body covered? 

With a soft, smooth but strong covering called skin 
Q. How many layers has the skin? 

Two. 
Q. What is the top layer called? 

The epidermis or cuticle. 
Q. What is the deep layer of the skin called? 

The true skin or derma. 
Q, What is imbedded in the true skin? 

The sweat glands and sebacious glands. 
Q. Where do they end? 

On the surface of the top skin. 



250 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. Of what does the top skin or epidermis consist? 

Of a thin, almost transparent, layer. 
Q. What does the top layer do constantly? 

It scales off and is renewed as it wears off. 
Q. What grows on some parts of the body from the chin? 

Hair; the roots of them lie deep in the skin. 
Q. What grows from the skin beside the hair? 

The nails on fingers and toes. 
Q. What do the sebacious glands manufacture? 

They manufacture an oily fluid or fat. 

Muscles. 

Q. What are muscles commonly called? 

Flesh. 
Q\ What are muscles? 

Dark red masses gathered up in bundles. 
Q. Where are the muscles situated? 

They are arranged over the skeleton, most of them 
being attached to a bone at each end. 
Q. What ability do they possess? 

The ability to expand and contract. 
Q. Is this ability alike in all muscles? 

No; in some it is greater than others, according to 
their size and use. 

Q. How are all the muscles of a limb arranged in a liv- 
ing body? 

They are bound together and covered with a fibrous 
tissue. 

Q. Through what are the muscles commonly attached to 
the bone? 

By means of tendons. 
Q. What are tendons? 

Glistening cords of fibrous tissue. 



THE NURSING SISTER. . 251 

Q. How many muscles are in the body? 
More than five hundred. 

Brain. 

Q. Where is the brain? 

It fills the chief cavity of the skull. 
Q. What color has it? 

It is a grayish, white mass. 
Q. Is it only one mass? 

No; there are several masses joined together. 
Q. How is it divided? 

Into the large brain (cerebrum) and small brain (cere- 
bellum). 

Q. Where is the large brain or the cerebrum placed? 

It is placed in the cavity of the skull from the fore- 
head to the back of the head. 

Q. Where is the smaller brain? 

It is in the back of the head, low down. 
Q. Of what service is the brain? 

It is the organ employed to think, feel and will. 
Q. What is a continuation of both, the cerebrum and: 
cerebellum? 

The spinal cord which occupies the spinal canal in 

the backbone. 

Q. How thick and how long is this cord? 

It is about half an inch thick and eighteen inches 
long. 

Q. What originates from the brain and spinal cord? 

Small white-yellowish strings — the nerves. 
Q. To where do they extend? 

They go out of the spinal canal through openings be- 
tween the vertebrae, and extend to all parts of the body. 
Q. What is connected by them? 

The different parts of the body are connected with 
the brain spinal cord. 



252 THE NURSING SISTER. 



Q. To what may the nervous system be compared? 

To the telegraphic system of a railroad. 

Q. What place do the nerves take? 

They are the wires which take and carry messages 

from the brain and spinal cord to the most exterior parts of 

the body. 

Q. What has each muscle? 

Each muscle has its nerve which gives it the power to 

move, to contract or relax. 

Q. What is the consequence, if the nerves of feeling are 

cut off from a certain part of the body? 

It will no longer obey your will: will not move: is 
lame. 

Q. What will the sensory nerves do? 

They carry messages from the outside or the deep 

parts of the body to the brain. 

Q. What is the consequence if the sensory nerves are cut 

off from the brain? 

That part is without feeling; feels no pain; no 

warmth; no cold; no pressure. 

Q. What does a third kind of nerves rule? 

They rule the unwilled actions, called reflex actions, 

such as heart action, digestion, respiration. 

The Organs of Sense. 

Q. What rules the organs of sense? 

A special group of nerves. 
Q. With what do we smell? 

With the nerves of smell. 
Q. Where do they spread? 

In the top of the nasal cavities. 
Q. With what do we taste? 

With nerves of taste, which spread on the top of the 
tongue and roof of the mouth. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 253 

Q. By what are external sounds perceived, such as noise, 

etc.? 

By the nerve of hearing. 

Q. Where are external sounds carried to? 

To the ear-drum. 
Q. To where is it carried from the ear-drum? 

To a chain of small, fine bones, the nerves of hearing, 
and then to the brain. 

Q. With what do we see and distinguish light from dark? 

With the nerves of sight or optic nerve. 
Q. Where are these nerves? 

In the eye. 
Q. How are the eyes shaped? 

They have an oval form and are constructed out of 
several membranes. 

Q. Where are the eyes situated? 

In the cavities of the skull, called orbits. 
Q. What is the middle of the eye? 

The pupil. 

The Lungs. 

Q. Where are the lungs? 

They are in the chest and occupy almost entirely this 
cavity. 

Q. What are the lungs? 

They are soft masses of little cells with very thin 
walls. 

Q. With what are the lungs covered? 

With the pleurae. 

Q. What is the pleurae? 

Two air-tight sacs, one for each lung, one layer covers 

the lung and the other lines the chest wall. 

Q. To what are the lungs first connected? 

To the bronchial tubes, higher up with the trachea, 

then with the larynx.with mouth and nose, and by these with 

outside air. 



254 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. For what purpose do the lungs serve? 

For breathing. 
Q. How is it done? 

By the expansion and contraction of the chest and the 
descending and the ascending of the diaphragm. 
Q. What may this be called? 

Inspiration and respiration. 
Q. What is inhaled with the act of inspiration? 

Air, which is a material substance, composed of gases 
and acid. 

Q. What comes in contact with this air in the lungs? 
The dark red blood which circulates in various veins 
in the lungs. 

Q. What effect has this upon the blood? 

It is purified, gets a bright red color and is rendered 
tit for circulation and sustaining of the body. 

Q. What is thrown off from the blood by expiration? . 

Carbonic acid gas principally. 
Q. What is the consequence of this? 

That in a room where there are many persons and no 
renewal takes place, the air becomes close and injurious. 

The Heart. 

Q. What is the heart? 

It is a muscular mass which contains several cavities 
and is about as large as a fist. 

Q. As what is it characterized? 

As a hollow involuntary muscle. 
Q. How is it shaped? 

Like a pear, with the small end pointing down, and to 
the left. 

Q. How is the interior of the heart divided? 

Into four cavities. The upper cavities are called aur- 
icles, the lower ones ventricles. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 255 



Q. What enter into each auricle? 

Large veins, which bring blood back from the body. 
Q. What is found between the auricle and ventricle? 

A valve, which consists of three thin flaps. 
Q. What does this prevent? 

It prevents the blood from passing back from the ven- 
tricle into the auricle. 

Q. From where does the blood flow out of the right ven- 
tricle? 

Into the large pulmonary artery, which soon divides 
into two branches and extends into both lungs. 
Q. Wnat opens out of the left ventricle? 

The great artery of the body, the aerta, which gives 
off numerous branches, which go to all parts of the body. 

Blood Vessels. 

Q. With what are all arteries and veins connected? 

With the heart. 
Q. What are blood vessels? 

They are pipes which serve for the circulation of the 
blood. 

Q. What are the blood vessels called? 

Veins, which carry dark red blood, and arteries, which 
carry bright red blood. 

Q. What are connected to the arteries and veins? 

Numerous small blood vessels, called capillaries. 
Q. What is formed by the capillaries? 

The connection between arteries and veins. 

The Most Important Arteries. 

Q. What arteries carry the blood to the head? 

The carotid arteries; they pass up on each side of the 
neck. 

Q. What arteries lie behind the collar-bone? 
The sub-clavian. 



256 THE NURSING SISTER. 

Q. How far does it extend? 

To arm-pit, and is called axillary artery. 
Q. To where does it then go? 

To the elbow, and is then called brachial. 
Q. What does it do at the elbow? 

It is divided into the radial and ulnar: the radial lies 
at the thumb side of the fore-arm and is the one in which the 
pulse is commonly felt. 

Q. What is the artery called which carries the main 
stream to the thigh? 

The femoral artery; it proceeds from the groin to the 
knee close along the bone. 

Q. What is it called in the leg? 

The tibial artery: lower down it divides into several 
branches leading to the foot. 

Veins. 

Q. Where do arteries extend to at last? 

Into the small blood vessels or capillaries? 
Q. What takes its beginning in these capillaries? 

The veins, which bring the blood back from the ex- 
tremities into always larger vessels and finally to the heart. 
Q. Where do the veins run? 

Generally along side of the arteries. 
Q. Where does the venous blood come together finally? 

In two large veins, which empty themselves into the 
right auricle. 

Blood. 

Q. What is blood? 

It is a red fluid, not transparent, having a salty taste. 
Q. Of what does blood consist? 

Of blood corpuscles, watery substance called plasma, 
and a coagulative substance. 



the nursing sister. 257 

Circulation of the Blood in the Body. 

Q. What does the heart do? 

It moves constantly from the first moment of life 

until death. 

Q. Where is its beat felt? 

On the left side of the chest? 

Q. What causes the beating? 

The extension and contraction of the auricles and 

ventricles. 

Q. What is forced out by this movement? 

The blood contained in the cavities, so as to make 

room for another supply. 

Q. To where is the blood forced from the left veDtricle? 

Into the large artery called aorta. 

Q. To where is it led from this? 

Into always smaller branches to the most distant parts 

of the body. 

Q. How is the blood brought back to the heart? 

After it flows from the capillaries of the arteries into 

the capillaries of the veins, then always into larger veins, 

which finally bring it back to the heart. 

Q. Into where do the veins empty the blood? 

Into the right auricle. 

Q. Where is it forced to from here? 

Into the right ventricle. 

Q. What is caused by the contraction of the right-auricle? 

The blood is lorced through the pulmary artery into 

the lungs. 

Q. What is clone in the lungs? 

• The blood is purified and becomes bright-red again. 

Q. To where does it return then? 

To the left ventricle and commences its circulation 
again. 



258 the nursing sister. 

Digestion. 

Q. Where does digestion take place? 

In the stomach and the alimentary canal. 
Q. Where does this commence? 

In the mouth, and ends in the large intestine. 
Q. With what is nourishment tasted after it is taken. 
into the mouth? 

With the tongue and palate. 
Q. With what is it masticated? 

With the teeth. 
Q. With what is food mixed while chewing is going on?" 
With saliva, which is produced by the saliva glands 
in the mouth, and is thereby formed into a mass, so as to- 
render it so that it can be swallowed. 

Q. How does the food reach the stomach? 

By passing from the mouth through the oesophagus. 
Q. What is the stomach? 

It is a membraneous sac situated on the left side of 
the trunk somewhat below the short ribs, and extends to the 
pit of the stomach. 

Q. What does digestion mean? 

The changes that take place in the food, as it passes 
through the alimentary canal, by which it is fitted to betaken 
up into the blood. 

Q. What is connected with the stomach? 

The intestines, first the small, then the large intestine- 
Q. How long is the intestine? 

About six times the length of the human body. 
Q. With what is it lined? 

With mucus membrane. 
Q. What is connected with the small intestines? 

The gall bladder, which furnishes bile needed for 
digestion. 



THE NURSING SISTER. 259 

Q. What is the liver? 

It is a large organ or gland, situated at the lower 
border of the ribs on the right side. 
Q. What does the liver make? 

It makes the bile. 
Q. What are the kidneys? 

They are two organs situated on each side of the small 
of the back. 

Q. What do they do? 

They carry off waste and matters from the blood, 
separating the urine from the blood. 
Q. What shape have they? 

The shape of a bean. 
Q. Where is the urine carried to from the kidneys? 

Into the bladder. 



'*&*¥&&*. 





■Ill mm ill 



Hflffifflf 



HH ■ ran 9 ■■■...:.:•.■_ 
wm Wmm Hi